2013 Jeep Patriot Owner`s Manual

2013 Patriot
2013
OWNER’S MANUAL
Chrysler Group LLC
13MK74-126-AA
First Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Patriot
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler Group LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver,
call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on
this vehicle. This manual may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer available or were
not ordered on this vehicle. Please disregard any features
and equipment described in this manual that are not on this
vehicle.
Chrysler Group LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
Copyright © 2012 Chrysler Group LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
10
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
䡵 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
䡵 ROLLOVER WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 䡵 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .7
䡵 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5 䡵 VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .8
1
4 INTRODUCTION
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained techCongratulations on selecting your new Chrysler Group
nicians and genuine MOPAR威 parts, and cares about
LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision
your satisfaction.
workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all
essentials that are traditional to our vehicles.
ROLLOVER WARNING
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various
customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to
read these publications carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate
than other types of vehicles. This vehicle has a higher
ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many
passenger cars. It is capable of performing better in a wide
variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe
manner, all vehicles can go out of control. Because of the
higher center of gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it
may roll over when some other vehicles may not.
NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other
should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc- unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle
ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.
INTRODUCTION 5
control. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result seat belts could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or fatal more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by
two million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted
injury. Drive carefully.
person is significantly more likely to die than a person
wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the
items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and
illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Rollover Warning Label
Consult the following table for a description of the
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts prosymbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
vided is a major cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the
this Owner’s Manual:
U.S. government notes that the universal use of existing
1
6 INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION 7
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
1
This Owners Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in a collision or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire Owners Manual, you may miss
important information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also is stamped into the
right front body, on the right front seat crossmember
under the carpet and the vehicle registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
8 INTRODUCTION
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or
death.
Right Front Body VIN Location
NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ Rearming The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
▫ Locking Doors With A Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override . . . . . .20
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14 䡵 REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 SENTRY KEY威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . .
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
▫ Illuminated Approach — If Equipped . . . .
䡵 VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED . . .18
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . .
▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
. . . .20
. . . .20
. . . .21
. . . .22
. . . .22
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . .22 䡵 POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .35
▫ Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . .23
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
▫ Auto-Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
▫ Programming Additional Transmitters. . . . . . . .24
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24 䡵 LIFTGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
▫ Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . . .25 䡵 OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
䡵 REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . .26
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . .48
䡵 DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
▫ Power Door Locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure . . . . .52
▫ Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions . . . . . .53
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
▫ Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
▫ Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) . . .55
▫ Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls . . . .67
▫ Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
䡵 ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . . .96
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
䡵 SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
▫ Transporting Passengers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
▫ Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) —
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
▫ Advanced Front Air Bag Features . . . . . . . . . . .63
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
2
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has 1. Place the shift lever in PARK (if equipped with an
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
automatic transmission).
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a 2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
safe place.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
place the shift lever in PARK, rotate the key to the right
slightly, then remove the key as described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the ignition
cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is inoperable.
The engine can be started and stopped but the key cannot
be removed until you obtain service.
WARNING!
Ignition Switch Positions
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and push
ignition button to place ignition in OFF position.
When leaving the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
2
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Locking Doors With A Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible by an authorized dealer.
2
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer system is not compatible with some after-market remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle and
lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
within 60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
will sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
following procedure:
stop flashing. To indicate that programming is com1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
plete, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on again for
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
three seconds and then turn off.
Customer Key Programming
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position for at
least three seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds.
Then, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position
and remove the first key.
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch. authorized dealer for details.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position
within 15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will
sound. In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will
begin to flash. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK
position and remove the second key.
2
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be reprogrammed.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
To Arm The System
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, liftgate,
and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior switches for
door locks are disabled. The Vehicle Security Alarm
provides both audio and visual signals, the horn will
sound, the headlights, park lamps and/or turn signals
General Information
will flash repeatedly for three minutes. If the disturbance
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15 is still present (driver’s door, passenger door, other doors,
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is ignition) after three minutes, the parking lights and tail
subject to the following conditions:
lights will flash for an additional 15 minutes.
• This device must accept any interference that may be 1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
received, including interference that may cause undeof the vehicle.
sired operation.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming.
During this period, if a door is opened, the ignition
switch is turned to ON/RUN, or the power door locks
are unlocked in any manner, the Vehicle Security
Alarm will automatically disarm. After approximately
16 seconds, the Vehicle Security Light will flash slowly.
This shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is fully
armed.
Rearming The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is taken to
disarm it, the Vehicle Security Alarm will turn off the
horn after three minutes, turn off all of the visual signals
after 15 minutes, and then the Vehicle Security Alarm will
rearm itself.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter, or insert the key
into the ignition switch and turn the ignition switch to
the ON/RUN position.
If something has triggered the Vehicle Security Alarm in
your absence, the horn will sound three times and exterior
lights blink three times when you unlock the doors. Check
the vehicle for tampering. The Vehicle Security Alarm is
designed to protect your vehicle; however, you can create
conditions where the Vehicle Security Alarm will arm
unexpectedly. If you remain in the vehicle and lock the
doors with the RKE transmitter, once the Vehicle Security
Alarm is armed (after 16 seconds), when you pull the door
handle to exit, the alarm will sound. If this occurs, press the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to disarm the
Vehicle Security Alarm.
2
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) —
IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a hand-held Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within
five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The turn
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock signal. 2. Release both buttons at the same time.
The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressRemote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
and the key removed.
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the 4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
current setting, proceed as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitInformation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle
ter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Information
Center
(EVIC)/Personal
Settings
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “UnderstandSecurity Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the Security Alarm.
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE: None of the courtesy lights will operate if the
dimmer control is in the “defeat” position (extreme • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
downward position), unless the overhead map/reading
following steps:
lights are turned on manually.
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transTo Lock The Doors And Liftgate
mitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitholding the LOCK button.
ter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
signal.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing • For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Personal Settings
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key
(Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
removed.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to • For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
its previous setting.
following steps:
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter 1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
button while still holding the UNLOCK button.
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressThis feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
ing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transthe doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitmitter with the ignition switch in the LOCK position
ter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
and the key removed.
the current setting, proceed as follows:
2
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to move
its previous setting.
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter
the system.
while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security Programming Additional Transmitters
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm.
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter, contact
Using The Panic Alarm
your authorized dealer for details.
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and General Information
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless 1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second 2. This device must accept any interference that may be
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved 1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
by the party responsible for compliance could void the
facing down, use a flat blade screwdriver to pry the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
two halves of the RKE transmitter apart. Make sure
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
not to damage the elastomer seal during removal.
distance, check for these two conditions:
1. Weak battery in the RKE transmitter. The expected life
of a battery is five years.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some
mobile or CB radios.
Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
Separating Case Halves
2
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Remove and replace the battery. Avoid touching the NOTE:
new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause • The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it
transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.
with rubbing alcohol.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and the Key Fob may
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
reduce this range.
halves together.
How To Use Remote Start
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
All of the following conditions must be met before the
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
engine will remote start:
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
• Shift lever in PARK
This system uses the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter to start the engine conve- • Doors closed
niently from outside the vehicle while still • Hood closed
maintaining security. The system has a range of
approximately 300 ft (91 m). Obstructions between the • Hazard switch off
vehicle and RKE transmitter may reduce this range.
• Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not pressed)
• Ignition key removed from ignition switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• RKE PANIC button not pressed
Remote Start Abort Message On Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the EVIC if the
• System not disabled from previous remote start event vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
• Vehicle theft alarm not active
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or
confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon
Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters
away from children. Operation of the Remote Start
System, windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
The EVIC message stays active until the ignition is turned
to the ON/RUN position.
2
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two
15-minute cycles) with the RKE transmitter. However,
Press and release the REMOTE START button on
the ignition switch must be cycled to the ON/RUN
the RKE transmitter twice within five seconds.
position before you can repeat the start sequence for a
The vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights
third cycle.
will flash and the horn will chirp twice (if programmed). Then, the engine will start and the vehicle will Remote start will also cancel if any of the following occur:
remain in the Remote Start mode for a 15-minute cycle.
• The engine stalls or RPM exceeds 2500
NOTE:
• Any engine warning lamps come on
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during
• Low Fuel Light turns on
Remote Start mode.
• The hood is opened
• For security, power window and power sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is • The hazard switch is pressed
in the Remote Start mode.
• The transmission is moved out of PARK
• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start
• The brake pedal is pressed
will automatically lock the doors.
To Enter Remote Start
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The
Vehicle
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Press and release the REMOTE START button one time or Use the manual door lock knob to lock the doors from
allow the engine to run for the entire 15-minute cycle.
inside the vehicle. If the lock knob is down when the door
NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
will disable the one time press of the REMOTE START inside the vehicle before closing the door.
button for two seconds after receiving a valid Remote
Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle
Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, press and release
the UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter to unlock
the doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm (if
equipped). Then, insert the key into the ignition switch
and turn the switch to the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN
position in order to drive the vehicle.
Manual Door Lock Knob
2
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the Key Fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN position.
A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s and
front passenger’s door panel. Press this switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
2
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key
is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock
2 - Lock
Auto Lock Doors — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.
When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically
when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h).
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by 2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK four
your authorized dealer. Please see your authorized dealer
times ending up in the LOCK position (do not start the
for service.
engine).
Auto Lock Doors Programming
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door LOCK switch
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
to lock the doors.
disabled as follows:
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Inforprogramming.
mation Center (EVIC), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/Personal Settings 5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
(Customer Programmable Features)” in “Understanding
its previous setting.
Your Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
following procedure:
did not enter the programming mode and you will
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
need to repeat the procedure.
switch.
• Use the Automatic Door Lock feature in accordance
with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
• The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled. 1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
• The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed 2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON/RUN and then back to LOCK five
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
times ending up in the ON/RUN position (do not start
• The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
the engine).
• The driver’s door is opened.
3. Within 30 seconds, press the power door UNLOCK
• The doors were not previously unlocked.
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit Programming
switch to unlock the doors.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
enabled or disabled as follows:
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Electronic
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If Equipped/
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
2
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the opposite rear door.
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small children riding
in the rear seats, the rear doors are equipped with
Child-Protection Door Lock system.
To Engage Or Disengage The Child-Protection
Door Lock System
1. Open the rear door.
2. Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and
rotate to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock knob up (unlocked position), roll down the
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are
engaged.
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
or ACC position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
2
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center
(EVIC)/Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”
for further information.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power window switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switch Location
Auto-Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto-Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto-Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window controls, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.
2
Window Lockout Switch
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors. The central locking/
unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated
from the liftgate key cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
Opening The Liftgate
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
NOTE:
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
• In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE
transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right (manual lock
models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the liftgate open with one fluid motion.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
• Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.
WARNING!
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous
exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
Do not use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems:
• Three-point lap and shoulder belts for the driver and
all passengers
• Advanced Front Air Bags for driver and front
passenger
• Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR) located
on top of the front seats (integrated into the head
restraint) — if equipped
2
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) Please pay close attention to the information in this
for the driver and passengers seated next to a window section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) — if
possible.
equipped
If you will be carrying children too small for adult-sized
• An energy-absorbing steering column and steering
seat belts, the seat belts or the Lower Anchors and Tether
wheel
for CHildren (LATCH) feature also can be used to hold
• Knee bolsters for front seat occupants
infant and child restraint systems. For more information
on LATCH, see Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren
• Front seat belts incorporate pretensioners that may
(LATCH).
enhance occupant protection by managing occupant
energy during an impact event
NOTE: The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage
inflator design. This allows the air bag to have different
• All seat belt systems (except the driver’s) include
rates of inflation based on several factors, including the
Automatic Locking Retractors (ALRs), which lock the
severity and type of collision.
seat belt webbing into position by extending the belt
all the way out and then adjusting the belt to the
desired length to restrain a child seat or secure a large
item in a seat — if equipped
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the If a child from 1 to 12 years old (not in a rear facing child
seat) must ride in the front passenger seat, move the seat
risk of harm from a deploying air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride as far back as possible and use the proper child restraint.
(Refer to “Child Restraints”)
buckled up in a rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear facing child restraints should never ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. An air bag deployment can cause
severe injury or death to infants in that position.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should always wear their lap and
shoulder belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the Advanced
Front Air Bags room to inflate.
Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see section on Child Restraints) should be 4. Do not lean against the door or window. If your
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltvehicle has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
side air bags will inflate forcefully into the space
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
between you and the door.
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
2
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you have
air bags.
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment
could cause serious injury, including death. Air
Bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably
extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) and Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
also need room to inflate. Do not lean against the
door or window. Sit upright in the center of the
seat.
(Continued)
(Continued)
WARNING!
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
WARNING! (Continued)
• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain (SABIC) and/or Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag (SAB) during deployment could cause
you to be severely injured or killed.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are equipped with
lap/shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen normal conditions. However, in a collision the belt will
lock and reduce the risk of you striking the inside of the
far away from home or on your own street.
vehicle or being thrown out.
2
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in a collision, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
2. The seat belt latch plate is along side the pillar near the 3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
back of your seat. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle
nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you properly. In a sudden stop you could move too far
forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear
your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the
vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
(Continued)
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A
snug belt reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in
a collision.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt may not protect you properly. In a
collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt
is straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer immediately and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Positioning Lap Belt
2
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
you will prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
In the rear seat, move toward the center of the seat to
position the belt away from your neck.
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a
three-point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which
allows the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor
when the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder
Adjustable Anchorage
belt can then be stored out of the way in the right side
As a guide, if you are shorter than average you will trim panel for added convenience.
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average
2
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
Routing The Rear Center Shoulder Belt
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the minilatch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a
Mini-Latch Stowage
“click.”
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
5. Sit back in the seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go
around your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch 7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull
up on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is
too tight, pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Connecting Mini-Latch To Buckle
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
2
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is 10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retracstorage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
tor will withdraw any slack in the belt.
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If neces9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow
the belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into
the slot provided in the trim panel.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
2. At about 6 to 12 in (15 to 30 cm) above the latch plate,
grasp and twist the belt webbing 180 degrees to create
a fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of
the latch plate.
First Row
Second Row
Driver
N/A
ALR
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
• N/A — Not Applicable
folded webbing.
Center
N/A
ALR
Passenger
ALR
ALR
Seat Belts In Passenger Seating Positions
• ALR — Automatic Locking Retractor
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR)
which are used to secure a child restraint system. For
additional information, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section. The chart below defines the type of
feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped with an
ALR and is being used for normal usage:
Only pull the belt webbing out far enough to comfortably
wrap around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not
activate the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
ratcheting sound as the belt retracts. Allow the webbing
to retract completely in this case and then carefully pull
out only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a ⬙click.⬙
2
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Locking Retractor Mode (ALR) —
If Equipped
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it
In this mode, the shoulder belt is automatically pre-locked. to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking
The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
shoulder belt. The Automatic Locking Mode is available on locking mode.
all passenger-seating positions with a combination lap/
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
WARNING!
child safety seat is installed in a seating position that has a
belt with this feature. Children 12 years old and under • The belt and retractor assembly must be replaced if
the seat belt assembly Automatic Locking Retractor
should always be properly restrained in the rear seat.
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function is not
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
working properly when checked according to the
procedures in the Service Manual.
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.
• Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until
could increase the risk of injury in collisions.
the entire belt is extracted.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt retracts, you will
hear a clicking sound. This indicates the safety belt is
now in the Automatic Locking Mode.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
This vehicle has a safety belt system with an Energy
worn snugly and positioned properly.
Management feature in the front seating positions to help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head-on The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the pretencollision.
sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or
This safety belt system has a retractor assembly that is
a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.
designed to release webbing in a controlled manner. This
feature is designed to help reduce the belt force acting on Supplemental Active Head Restraints (AHR)
the occupant’s chest.
These head restraints are passive, deployable compoEnergy Management Feature
nents, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspecThe seat belts for both front seating positions are
tion of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
These devices may improve the performance of the seat
belt by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant How The Active Head Restraints (AHR) Work
early in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occu- The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
pants, including those in child restraints.
whether the severity, or type of rear impact will require
Seat Belt Pretensioners
2
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
the Active Head Restraints (AHR) to deploy. If a rear
impact requires deployment, both the driver and front
passenger seat AHRs will be deployed.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts.
NOTE: The Active Head Restraints (AHR) may or may
not deploy in the event of a front or side impact.
Active Head Restraint (AHR) Components
However if during a front impact, a secondary rear
impact occurs, the AHR may deploy based on the sever- 1 — Head Restraint Front Half 3 — Head Restraint Back Half
ity and type of the impact.
(Soft Foam and Trim)
(Decorative Plastic Rear Cover)
2 — Seatback
4 — Head Restraint Guide
Tubes
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
CAUTION!
1. Grasp the deployed AHR from the rear seat.
All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the head
restraints are placed in their proper positions in order
to minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a
collision.
2
NOTE: For more information on properly adjusting and
positioning the head restraint, refer to “Adjusting Active
Head Restraints” in “Understanding The Features Of
Your Vehicle”.
Resetting Active Head Restraints (AHR)
Hand Positioning Points On AHR
If the Active Head Restraints are triggered in a collision, 2. Position the hands on the top of the deployed AHR at
you must reset the head restraint on the driver’s and
a comfortable position.
front passenger seat. You can recognize when the Active
Head Restraint has been triggered by the fact that they
have moved forward (as shown in step three of the
resetting procedure).
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull down then rearward towards the rear of the vehicle
then down to engage the locking mechanism.
3 — Final Downward Movement To Engage Locking Mechanism
1 — Downward Movement
2 — Rearward Movement
4. The AHR front soft foam and trim half should lock
into the back decorative plastic half.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
BeltAlert威 is a feature intended to remind the driver and
front passenger (if equipped with front passenger
BeltAlert威) to fasten their seat belts. The feature is active
whenever the ignition is on. If the driver or front seat
passenger is unbelted, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until both front seat belts are
fastened.
The BeltAlert威 warning sequence begins after the vehicle
speed is over 5 mph (8 km/h), by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent chime.
AHR In Reset Position
Once the sequence starts, it will continue for the entire
NOTE:
duration or until the respective seatbelts are fastened.
• If you have difficulties or problems resetting the Active
After the sequence completes, the Seat Belt Reminder
Head Restraints, see an authorized dealer.
Light remains illuminated until the respective seat belts
• For safety reasons, have the Active Head Restraints are fastened. The driver should instruct all other occuchecked by a qualified specialist at an authorized dealer. pants to fasten their seat belts. If a front seat belt is
2
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
unbuckled while traveling at speeds greater than 5 mph Seat Belt Extender
(8 km/h), BeltAlert威 will provide both audio and visual If a seat belt is too short even when fully extended and
notification.
when the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
The front passenger seat BeltAlert威 is not active when the equipped) is in its lowest position, your authorized
front passenger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert威 may be dealer can provide you with a seat belt extender. This
triggered when an animal or heavy object is on the front extender should be used only if the existing belt is not
passenger seat or when the seat is folded flat (if long enough. When it is not required, remove the exequipped). It is recommended that pets be restrained in tender and store it.
the rear seat in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are
secured by seat belts, and cargo is properly stowed.
WARNING!
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer. Chrysler Group LLC does not recommend deactivating BeltAlert威.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger (if equipped with
BeltAlert威) seat belt remains unfastened.
Using a seat belt extender when not needed can increase the risk of injury in a collision. Only use when
the seat belt is not long enough when it is worn low
and snug and in the recommended seating positions.
Remove and store the extender when not needed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Air Bags
This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the
driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air
Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The
passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The
words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on the air bag covers.
Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags
2 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bags are certified to new Federal regulations.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bags have a multistage inflator
design. This allows the air bag to have different rates of
inflation that are based on the severity and type of
collision.
This vehicle may be equipped with Supplemental SeatMounted Side Air Bags (SAB) to provide enhanced
protection for an occupant during a side impact. The
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags are located in
the outboard side of the front seats.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or front
passenger seat track position sensors that may adjust the NOTE:
inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
seat position.
but they will open during air bag deployment.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front
passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether • After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an
authorized dealer immediately.
the driver or front passenger seat belt is fastened. The
seat belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the Air Bag System Components
Advanced Front Air Bags.
Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental Side Air Bag system components:
Inflatable Curtains (SABIC) to protect the driver, front,
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
and rear passengers sitting next to a window. The SABIC
are located above the side windows. The trim covering • Air Bag Warning Light
the side air bags is labeled SRS AIRBAG.
• Steering Wheel and Column
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolster
• Driver Advanced Front Air Bag
• Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
• Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
• Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABIC)
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Front Seat Belt Pretensioners, Seat Belt Buckle Switch,
and Seat Track Position Sensors
Advanced Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage
driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides
output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as
determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),
which may receive information from the front impact
sensors.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an
impact that requires air bag deployment. This low output
is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy output is
used for more severe collisions.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near the air bag
on the instrument panel, because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a collision
severe enough to cause the air bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers
or attempt to open them manually. You may damage
the air bags and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open
only when the air bags are inflating.
(Continued)
2
64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not drill, cut or tamper with the knee bolster in
any way.
• Do not mount any accessories to the knee bolster
such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band radios,
etc.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB)
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) may
provide enhanced protection to help protect an occupant
during a side impact. The SAB is marked with an air bag
label sewn into the outboard side of the front seats.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the air bag deploys, it opens the seam between the
front and side of the seat’s trim cover. Each air bag
deploys independently; a left side impact deploys the left
air bag only and a right-side impact deploys the right air
bag only.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC)
SABIC air bags may offer side-impact and vehicle rollover protection to front and rear seat outboard occupants
in addition to that provided by the body structure. Each
air bag features inflated chambers placed adjacent to the
head of each outboard occupant that reduce the potential
for side-impact head injuries. The SABIC air bags deploy
downward, covering both windows on the impact side.
2
Side Curtain Air Bag Label Location
NOTE:
• Should a vehicle rollover occur, the pretensioners
and/or SAB and SABIC curtains on both sides of the
vehicle may deploy.
• Air Bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,
but they will open during air bag deployment.
66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Being too close to the Supplemental Side Air Bag
Inflatable Curtain and/or Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
during deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
The system includes side impact sensors that are calibrated to deploy the side air bags during impacts that
require air bag occupant protection.
WARNING!
• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right SABIC,
do not stack luggage or other cargo up high enough
to block the location of the SABIC. The area where
the side curtain air bag is located should remain free
from any obstructions.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the SAB; the performance could
be adversely affected and/or objects could be
pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• Your vehicle is equipped with SABIC air bags, do
not have any accessory items installed which will
alter the roof, including adding a sunroof to your
vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require permanent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation
on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the
vehicle for any reason.
SAB and SABIC air bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Occupants, including children who are
up against or very close to SAB or SABIC air bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants, especially children, should not lean on or sleep against the door, side
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67
windows, or area where the SAB or SABIC air bags Air Bag Deployment Sensors And Controls
inflate, even if they are in an infant or child restraint.
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Always sit upright as possible with your back against the The ORC is part of a Federally regulated safety system
seat back, use the seat belts properly, and use the required for this vehicle.
appropriate sized child restraint, infant restraint or
booster seat recommended for the size and weight of the The ORC determines if deployment of the front and/or
side air bags in a frontal or side collision is required.
child.
Based on the impact sensor’s signals, a central electronic
Knee Impact Bolsters
ORC deploys the Advanced Front Air Bags, SABIC air
The Knee Impact Bolster helps protect the knees of the bags, Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags — if
front passenger, and position the front occupant for the equipped, and front seat belt pretensioners, as required,
best interaction with the Advanced Front Air Bag.
depending on several factors, including the severity and
type of impact.
Along with seat belts and pretensioners, Advanced Front
Air Bags work with the bolsters to provide improved Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addiprotection for the driver and front passenger. Side air tional protection by supplementing the seat belts in
bags also work with seat belts to improve occupant certain frontal collisions depending on several factors,
protection.
2
68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
including the severity and type of collision. Advanced Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colliFront Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk of sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,
away from an inflating air bag.
injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions.
The Advanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may produce substantial vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions, truck underrides, and angle offset collisions. On
the other hand, depending on the type and location of
impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes
with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a
severe initial deceleration.
The side air bags will not deploy in all side collisions.
Side air bag deployment will depend on the severity and
type of collision.
The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of
the air bag system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply system that
may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or
it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.
Also, the ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds for a self-check
when the ignition is first turned on. After the
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration
over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the
not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should ORC detects a malfunction in any part of the system, it
have deployed.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either momentarily Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light Inflator Units
comes on again after initial startup.
The Driver and Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
It also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instru- Inflator Units are located in the center of the steering
ment cluster Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is wheel and on the right side of the instrument panel.
noted that could affect the air bag system. The diagnos- When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Advanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
tics also record the nature of the malfunction.
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the
Advanced Front Air Bags. Different air bag inflation rates
WARNING!
are possible, based on several factors, including the
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru- collision type and severity. The steering wheel hub trim
ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags cover and the upper right side of the instrument panel
to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come separate and fold out of the way as the air bags inflate to
on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned their full size. The air bags fully inflate in about 50 to
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes 70 milliseconds. This is about half of the time it takes to
on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while
air bag system immediately.
helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.
2
70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The Advanced Front Air Bag gas is vented through the you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
vent holes in the sides of the air bag. In this way, the air positioned in the area where the side air bag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
bags do not interfere with your control of the vehicle.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag (SAB)
Inflator Units
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain
(SABIC) Inflator Units
The Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SAB) are During collisions where the impact is confined to a
designed to activate only in certain side collisions.
particular area of the side of the vehicle, the ORC may
deploy the SABIC air bags, depending on the severity
The ORC determines if a side collision requires the side
and type of collision. In these events, the ORC will
air bags to inflate, based on the severity and type of
deploy the SABIC only on the impact side of the vehicle.
collision.
A quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the side
Based on the severity and type of collision, the side air
curtain air bag. The inflating side curtain air bag pushes
bag inflator on the crash side of the vehicle may be
the outside edge of the headliner out of the way and
triggered, releasing a quantity of non-toxic gas. The
covers the window. The air bag inflates in about 30
inflating SAB exits through the seat seam into the space
milliseconds (about one-quarter of the time that it takes
between the occupant and the door. The SAB fully inflate
to blink your eyes) with enough force to injure you if you
in about 10 milliseconds. The side air bag moves at a very
are not belted and seated properly, or if items are
high speed and with such a high force that it could injure
positioned in the area where the side curtain air bag
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71
inflates. This especially applies to children. The side event the ORC will determine whether to have the
curtain air bag is only about 3-1/2 in (9 cm) thick when Enhanced Accident Response System perform the following functions:
it is inflated.
Because air bag sensors estimate deceleration over time, • Cut off fuel to the engine.
vehicle speed and damage are not good indicators of
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or
whether or not an air bag should have deployed.
until the ignition key is turned off.
NOTE: In a rollover the pretensioners and/or SAB and
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
SABIC air bags may deploy on both sides of the vehicle.
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
Front And Side Impact Sensors
In front and side impacts, impact sensors can aid the • Unlock the doors automatically.
ORC in determining appropriate response to impact
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System
events.
functions after an event, the ignition switch must be
Enhanced Accident Response System
changed from IGN ON to IGN OFF.
In the event of an impact causing air bag deployment, if If A Deployment Occurs
the communication network remains intact, and the
The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate
power remains intact, depending on the nature of the
immediately after deployment.
2
72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with
the air bag system.
If you do have a collision, which deploys the air bags, any
or all of the following may occur:
bag inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye
irritation, rinse the area with cool water. For nose or
throat irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation
continues, see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• The nylon air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and
front passenger as the air bags deploy and unfold. The Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have deabrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium bags will not be in place to protect you.
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
WARNING!
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,
immediately.
seat belt pretensioners, and the front seat belt retrac• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like tor assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imparticles. The particles are a normal by-product of the mediately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Conprocess that generates the non-toxic gas used for air troller System serviced as well.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the air bag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured if the air bag system is not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not
modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or
add aftermarket side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air
bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.
(Continued)
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag
system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may
not function properly if modifications are made.
Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any
way (including removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your
authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved
seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to
modify the air bag system for persons with disabilities, contact your authorized dealer.
2
74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Bag Warning Light
NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. The air bags may
not be ready to inflate for your protection. Promptly
check the fuse block for blown fuses. Refer to the label
located on the inside of the fuse block cover for the
proper air bag fuses. See your authorized dealer if the
fuse is good.
You will want to have the air bags ready to
inflate for your protection in a collision. The
Air Bag Warning Light monitors the internal
circuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with air bag system electrical components. While the air
bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of
the following occurs, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder
the four to eight seconds when the ignition switch is (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in
first turned on.
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems pereight second interval.
formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of
remains on while driving.
time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle
is designed to record such data as:
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75
• How various systems in your vehicle were operating; To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is
required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.
• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts
In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
were buckled/fastened;
such as law enforcement, that have the special equip• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the ment, can read the information if they have access to the
accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
vehicle or the EDR.
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Child Restraints
These data can help provide a better understanding of Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times, including babies and children. Every state in the
the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.
United States, and every Canadian province, requires
NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
that small children ride in proper restraint systems. This
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) Children 12 years or younger should ride properly
are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en- buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
personally identifying data routinely acquired during a the rear seats rather than in the front.
crash investigation.
2
76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has
a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. You should also make sure that you can install
it in the vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE: For additional information, refer to
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK. Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s website for additional information: http://www.tc.gc.ca/
eng/roadsafety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a
projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to
hold even an infant on your lap could become so
great that you could not hold the child, no matter
how strong you are. The child and others could be
badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle
should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infants and Toddlers
Small Children
Larger Children
Children Too Large for
Child Restraints
Child Size, Height, Weight or Age
Children who are two years old or
younger and who have not reached the
height or weight limits of their child
restraint
Children who are at least two years old
or who have out-grown the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child
restraint
Children who have out-grown their
forward-facing child restraint, but are
too small to properly fit the vehicle’s
seat belt
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have out-grown the height or weight
limit of their booster seat
Recommended Type of Child Restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in
the rear seat of the vehicle
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the
vehicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
2
78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride rearwardfacing in the vehicle until they are two years old or until
they reach either the height or weight limit of their rear
facing child safety seat. Two types of child restraints can
be used rearward-facing: infant carriers and convertible
child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from birth until
they reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.
Convertible child seats can be used either rearwardfacing or forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child
seats often have a higher weight limit in the rearwardfacing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be
used rearward-facing by children who have outgrown
their infant carrier but are still less than at least two years
old. Children should remain rearward-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by their
convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear facing infant seat in front of an
air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rearward
facing infant seat.
• Only use a rearward-facing child restraint in a rear
seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have outgrown
their rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forwardfacing in the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and
convertible child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of
their rear-facing convertible child seat. Children should
remain in a forward-facing child seat with a harness for
as long as possible, up to the highest weight or height
allowed by the child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a
belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts
fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over
the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster
seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held
in the vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in
the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it
loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
2
80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching
the child’s thighs and not their stomach?
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the
child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the
simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the
child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check belt fit perivehicle’s seat belt alone:
odically. A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face
the vehicle seat?
or neck, move the child closer to the center of the vehicle.
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an arm
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front
of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the or behind their back.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder
between their neck and arm?
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Combined
Weight of the
Child + Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below
LATCH –
Seat Belt Only
LATCH –
Seat Belt + Top
Lower Anchors
Lower Anchors
Tether Anchor
Only
+ Top Tether
Anchor
X
X
X
X
X
X
2
82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system
has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCHequipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages
located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the
seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the
seating position. These anchorages are used to install
LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s
seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating
positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the
following table for more information.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In
This Vehicle
2
Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per seating
position
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach the
child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat
belt be used together to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint?
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages?
No
Yes
Use the LATCH anchorage system until
the combined weight of the child and the
child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the
seat belt and tether anchor instead of the
LATCH system once the combined weight
is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rearfacing or forward-facing child restraint.
You can install child restraints with flexible
lower anchors in the center position. The
inner anchorages are 15.5 inches (390 mm)
apart. Do not install child restraints with
rigid lower anchors in the center position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85
Can two child restraints be attached using
a common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Can the head restraints be removed?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with
two or more child restraints. If the center
position does not have dedicated LATCH
lower anchorages, use the seat belt to
install a child seat in the center position
next to a child seat using the LATCH
anchorages in an outboard position.
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact. See your
child restraint owner’s manual for more
information.
2
86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars that are
found at the rear of the seat cushion where it
meets the seatback. They are just visible when
you lean into the rear seat to install the child
restraint. You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
In addition, there are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position located on
the back of the seat.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be
equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.
Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower
anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some
rear-facing infant restraints will also be equipped with a
tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end
to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more
than one child restraint. If you are installing LATCHcompatible child restraints next to each other, you
must use the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s
seat belt for installing child seats in the outboard
positions. Please refer to “Installing The LATCHCompatible Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower attachments in the center seating position. Only install this type Always follow the directions of the child restraint manuof child restraint in the outboard seating positions. Child facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child
restraints with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach- restraint systems will be installed as described here.
ments can be installed in any rear seating position.
2
88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child
restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat1. If the selected seating position has a Switchable Autoing position.
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat
belt, following the instructions below. See the section 5. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the
top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child
“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat
Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direcBelt” to check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
tions to attach a tether anchor.
To Install A LATCH-compatible Child Restraint
2. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the 6. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint
tether strap of the child seat so that you can more
rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack
in the straps according to the child restraint manufaceasily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle
turer’s instructions.
anchorages.
3. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for 7. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
that seating position. For some second row seats, you
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit.
in any direction.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89
How To Stow An Unused ALR Seatbelt
When using the LATCH attaching system to install a
child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being
used by other occupants or being used to secure child
restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play
with it and accidentally lock the seatbelt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,
buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of
the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with
the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock
the seatbelt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the
seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with
them.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to the
LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat
Belt
The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are
equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both
types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of
the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can
be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the
2
90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems for Installing Child
retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will Restraints in this Vehicle
make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor. For additional information on ALR,
refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints.” The cinching latch plate is
designed to hold the lap portion of the seatbelt tight
when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a
child restraint’s belt path. Please see the table below and
the following sections for more information about both
types of seat belts.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91
What is the weight limit (child’s
weight + weight of the child restraint)
for using the Tether Anchor with the
seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Can the rear-facing child restraint
touch the back of the front passenger
seat?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Can the head restraints be removed?
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to
tighten the seat belt against the belt
path of the child restraint?
No
Yes
Yes
Always use the tether anchor when
using the seat belt to install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the
child restraint.
Contact between the front passenger
seat and the child restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
In positions with cinching latch
plates (CINCH), the buckle stalk
may be twisted up to 3 full turns. Do
not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
2
92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of
the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing
out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
Place the child seat in the center of the seating
back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you
position. For some second row seats, you may need to
will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is
recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a
now in the Automatic Locking mode.
better fit.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is
Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor
locked, you should not be able to pull out any webto pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.
bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.
Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
“click.”
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight
against the child seat.
Installing A Child Restraint with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
1.
2.
3.
4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Chilposition. For some second row seats, you may need to
dren (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get
attach a tether anchor.
a better fit.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by
2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt
retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt
in any direction.
path.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
“click.”
4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion around the child restraint while you push
the child restraint rearward and downward into the
vehicle seat.
2
94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the
seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect
the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether
strap. Refer to “Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) Restraint System” for directions to
attach a tether anchor.
facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4
to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child
restraint.
If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the
buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn
the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child
pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.
path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether
in any direction.
Anchorage
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the
1. Look behind the seating position where you plan to
belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.
install the child restraint to find the tether anchorage.
If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the
You may need to move the seat forward to provide
belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have
better access to the tether anchorage. If there is no top
trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discontether anchorage for that seating position (see the
nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short
charts above), move the child restraint to another
buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert
position in the vehicle if one is available.
the latch plate into the buckle with the release button
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path 4. Remove slack in the tether strap according to the child
for the strap between the anchor and the child seat,
restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
routing it over the center of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child restraint to
the top tether anchorage as shown in the diagram.
Tether Anchorage Locations
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,
make sure the tether strap does not slip into the
opening between the seatbacks as you remove slack
in the strap.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
2
96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses under which vehicle operations will occur. For the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to “Mainteor pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
nance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine and
drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km). in the engine or damage may result.
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the should be considered a normal part of the break-in and
limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in. not interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
SAFETY TIPS
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a Transporting Passengers
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil changes
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
should be consistent with anticipated climate conditions
AREA.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may
cause serious injury or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),
follow these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in
confined areas any longer than needed to move
your vehicle in or out of the area.
• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed and
the climate control BLOWER switch is set at high
speed. DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
(Continued)
2
98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running, adjust your heating or cooling
controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
system.
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com- Air Bag Warning Light
plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
The light should come on and remain on for
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
ignition switch is first turned ON. If the light is
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
not lit during starting, see your authorized
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99
dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes on while
driving, have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your
vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area
unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they
cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals
or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of
vehicle control and increase the risk of serious personal injury.
• Always make sure that floor mats are properly
attached to the floor mat fasteners.
• Never place or install floor mats or other floor
coverings in the vehicle that cannot be properly
secured to prevent them from moving and interfering with the pedals or the ability to control the
vehicle.
• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top
of already installed floor mats. Additional floor
mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the
pedal area and interfere with the pedals.
(Continued)
2
100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always
properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have
been removed for cleaning.
• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the
driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects
can become trapped under the brake pedal and
accelerator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.
• If required, mounting posts must be properly installed, if not equipped from the factory.
Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or
mounting can cause interference with the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of
control of the vehicle.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the tires
(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and
exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn
signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument
panel.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
2
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107 䡵 Uconnect威 Phone — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .108
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver Side . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Uconnect威 Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger Side . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . .128
▫ Folding Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect威 Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
▫ Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .110
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
䡵 VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .141
▫ Voice Command System Operation . . . . . . . . .141
3
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143 䡵 TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .160
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146 䡵 LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
䡵 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Power Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
▫ Headlights And Parking Lights . . . . . . . . . . .162
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
▫ Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped . . . . .163
▫ Manual Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . .150
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .152
▫ Driver’s Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .154
▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . .159
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
▫ Instrument Panel Dimming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
䡵 WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .168 䡵 GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .176
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink威. . .177
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .180
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . . .181
䡵 TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
䡵 ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173
▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184
䡵 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .185
▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .186
▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186
3
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .186 䡵 CONSOLE FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186 䡵 CARGO AREA FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
䡵 ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .188
䡵 POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . .190
䡵 CUPHOLDERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192
䡵 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
▫ Glove Compartment And Storage Bin . . . . . . .194
▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
▫ Cargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
▫ Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .202
䡵 REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
䡵 ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED . . . .205
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Inside Day/Night Mirror
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
to the left of the button will illuminate to indicate when
the dimming feature is activated. The sensor to the right
of the button does not illuminate.
NOTE: This feature is disabled when the vehicle is
moving in reverse.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
Outside Mirror — Driver Side
Folding Outside Mirrors
Adjust the flat outside mirror so you can just see the side The outside mirrors are hinged and may be moved,
of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the manually, either forward or rearward to resist damage.
vehicle with your head close to the door glass.
The hinges have three detent positions; full forward, full
rearward and normal.
Outside Mirror — Passenger Side
Power Mirrors
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the The power mirror control is located on the driver’s door
vehicle with your head close to the center of the vehicle. trim panel.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
3
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This
feature is activated whenever you turn on the rear
window defroster. Refer to “Rear Window Features” in
“Understanding the Features of Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Power Mirror Control
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move.
When you are finished adjusting the mirror, turn the
control to the center position to prevent accidentally
moving a mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
Uconnect姞 Phone — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect威 Phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. Uconnect威 Phone allows
you to dial a phone number with your mobile phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., “Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ “Work” or
“Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212”). Your mobile phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the system will automatically mute your radio when using the
Uconnect威 Phone.
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 “Hands-Free Profile”, Version 0.96 or higher. See the Uconnect威 website for supported phones.
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more For Uconnect威 customer support, visit
coverage of the side glass.
www.UconnectPhone.com or call 1–877–855–8400.
3
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect威 Phone allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your mobile phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The Uconnect威 Phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone. Uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so Uconnect威 Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
Uconnect威 Phone. The Uconnect威 Phone allows up to
seven mobile phones to be linked to the system. Only one
linked (or paired) mobile phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws, including laws regarding phone use. Your attention should be focused on safely operating the
vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a collision
causing serious injury or death.
Uconnect威 Phone Button
The radio or steering wheel controls (if
equipped) will contain the two control buttons
button and Voice Com(Uconnect威 Phone
mand
button) that will enable you to
access the system. When you press the button you will
hear the word Uconnect威 followed by a BEEP. The beep
is your signal to give a command.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Voice Command Button
Operation
Actual button location may vary with the ra- Voice commands can be used to operate the Uconnect威
dio. The individual buttons are described in the Phone and to navigate through the Uconnect威 Phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
“Operation” section.
Uconnect威 Phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
The Uconnect威 Phone can be used with any Hands-Free specific command and then guided through the available
Profile certified Bluetooth威 mobile phone. See the options.
Uconnect威 website for supported phones. Refer to your
mobile service provider or the phone manufacturer for • Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for the
beep, which follows the “Ready” prompt or another
details.
prompt.
The Uconnect威 Phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the Uconnect威 Phone • For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying “Setup” and then
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
“Pair a Device”, the following compound command
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
can be said: “Pair a Bluetooth威 Device”.
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from • For each feature explanation in this section, only the
compound form of the voice command is given. You
the Uconnect威 Phone such as “CELL” or caller ID on
can also break the commands into parts and say each
certain radios.
3
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the compound form voice command “Phonebook New Entry”, or you can break the
compound form command into two voice commands:
“Phonebook” and “New Entry”. Please remember, the
Uconnect威 Phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
To activate the Uconnect威 Phone, simply press the
button and follow the audible prompts for directions.
Uconnect威 Phone sessions begin with a press of the
button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say “Cancel” and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect威 Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect威 Phone, you must pair
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled mobile phone.
know your options at any prompt, say “Help” following
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference
the beep. The Uconnect威 Phone will play some of the
your mobile phone Owner’s Manual. The Uconnect威 weboptions at any prompt if you ask for help.
site may also provide detailed instructions for pairing.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
The following are general phone to Uconnect威 Phone • You will then be asked to give your mobile phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
pairing instructions:
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phones to your Uconnect威 Phone. However, at any
given time, only one mobile phone can be in use,
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Device Pairing”.
connected to your Uconnect威 System. The priority
allows the Uconnect威 Phone to know which mobile
• When prompted, after the beep, say “Pair a Device”
phone to use if multiple mobile phones are in the
and follow the audible prompts.
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identiand priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
Uconnect威 Phone will use the priority three mobile
fication Number (PIN), which you will later need to
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
enter into your mobile phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
lower priority mobile phone at any time (refer to
“Advanced Phone Connectivity” in this section).
after the initial pairing process.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to Dial By Saying A Number
give the Uconnect威 Phone a name for your mobile
button to begin.
• Press the
phone. Each mobile phone that is paired should be
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
given a unique phone name.
“Dial”.
3
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say “234-567-8901”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call By Saying A Name
• Press the
button to begin.
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to “Add Names to Your
Uconnect威 Phonebook”, in the phonebook.
• The Uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names To Your Uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the Uconnect威 Phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
•
“Call”.
•
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
•
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say “John Doe”, where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the Uconnect威 phonebook
Press the
button to begin.
After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Phonebook New Entry”.
When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the Voice Command and it is recommended. For example, say “Robert Smith” or “Robert”
instead of “Bob”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
• When prompted, enter the number designation
(e.g., “Home”, “Work”, “Mobile”, or “Other”). This
will allow you to store multiple numbers for each
phonebook entry, if desired.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads names (text
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the names) and number entries from your mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
phonebook entry that you are adding.
Access Profile may support this feature. See Uconnect威
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonewebsite for supported phones.
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the • To call a name from the Uconnect威 Phonebook or
downloaded Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call
main menu.
by Saying a Name” section.
The Uconnect威 Phone will allow you to enter up to
32 names in the phonebook with each name having up to • Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
made to the Uconnect威 Phone, for example, after you
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
start the vehicle.
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, Uconnect威 Phone automatically downloads your mobile phone’s phonebook.
3
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be down- Edit Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
loaded and updated every time a phone is connected
NOTE:
to the Uconnect威 Phone.
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downwhen the vehicle is not in motion.
loaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if avail- • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
able, the previously downloaded phonebook is available for use.
button to begin.
• Press the
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected mobile
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
phone is accessible.
“Phonebook Edit Entry”.
• Either the mobile phone’s phonebook or the mobile
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
phone’s SIM card phonebook is downloaded.
entry that you wish to edit.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
deleted on the Uconnect威 Phone. These can only be
mobile, or other) that you wish to edit.
edited on the mobile phone. The changes are transferred and updated to Uconnect威 Phone on the next • When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
phone connection.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook, • After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
entry that you wish to delete or you can say “List
to the main menu.
Names” to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
“Phonebook Edit Entry” can be used to add another
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
phone number to a name entry that already exists in the
from the list, press the
button while the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
Uconnect威 Phone is playing the desired entry and say
mobile and a home number, but you can add “John
“Delete”.
Doe’s” work number later using the “Phonebook Edit
• After you enter the name, the Uconnect威 Phone will
Entry” feature.
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
Delete Uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
work, mobile, other, or all. Say the designation you
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
wish to delete.
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
button to begin.
• Press the
language is deleted.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say • Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
“Phonebook Delete”.
deleted or edited.
3
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” Uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the
button to begin.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
• To call one of the names in the list, press the
button
“Phonebook Erase All”.
during the playing of the desired name, and say “Call”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will ask you to verify that you
NOTE: The user can also exercise “Edit” or “Delete”
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be operations at this point.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• The selected number will be dialed.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
Phone Call Features
deleted or edited.
The following features can be accessed through the
List All Names In The Uconnect威 Phonebook
Uconnect威 Phone if the feature(s) are available on your
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile service
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the Uconnect威 Phone. Check with your
“Phonebook List Names”.
mobile service provider for the features that you have.
deleted.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
NOTE: The Uconnect威 Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
When you receive a call on your mobile phone, the
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Uconnect威 Phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call. Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
button to accept the call. To reject the call, Progress
Press the
button until you hear a single beep,
press and hold the
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
indicating that the incoming call was rejected.
button and say “Dial” or “Call” followed
press the
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — Call
by the phone number or phonebook entry you wish to
Currently In Progress
call. The first call will be on hold while the second call is
If a call is currently in progress and you have another in progress. To go back to the first call, refer to “Toggling
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for Between Calls” in this section. To combine two calls, refer
call waiting that you normally hear when using your to “Conference Call” in this section.
Answer Or Reject An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
button to place the current
mobile phone. Press the
call on hold and answer the incoming call.
3
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the
button until you hear
a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold. To
butbring the call back from hold, press and hold the
ton until you hear a single beep.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the
button while
a call is in progress, and make a second phone call, as
described under “Making a Second Call While Current
Call is in Progress”. After the second call has established,
button until you hear a double
press and hold the
Toggling Between Calls
beep, indicating that the two calls have been joined into
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold), one conference call.
press the
button until you hear a single beep, indicatCall Termination
ing that the active and hold status of the two calls have
butswitched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a time. To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
ton. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
Conference Call
is a call on hold, it will become the new active call. If the
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on active call is terminated by the phone far end, a call on
button until you hear a hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
hold), press and hold the
double beep indicating that the two calls have been phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
joined into one conference call.
button until you hear a single beep.
and hold the
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
• After the ignition is cycled to OFF, a call can continue
on the Uconnect威 Phone for a certain duration, after
• Press the
button to begin.
which the call is automatically transferred from the
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
Uconnect威 Phone to the mobile phone.
“Redial”.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the mo• The Uconnect威 Phone will call the last number that
bile phone after the ignition is cycled to OFF.
was dialed from your mobile phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the Uconnect姞 Phone Features
Redial
Uconnect威 Phone.
Language Selection
Call Continuation
To change the language that the Uconnect威 Phone is using:
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the • Press the
button to begin.
Uconnect威 Phone after the vehicle ignition has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality avail- • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
able on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
English, Espanol, or Francais.
• After the ignition is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the Uconnect威 Phone either until the call • Continue to follow the system prompts to complete the
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
language selection.
cessation of the call on the Uconnect威 Phone and
transfer of the call to the mobile phone.
3
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Emergency” and the Uconnect威 Phone will instruct
voice commands will be in that language.
the paired mobile phone to call the emergency number.
NOTE: After every Uconnect威 Phone language change
This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phoneMexico.
book is usable. The paired phone name is not languageNOTE:
specific and is usable across all languages.
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
If you are in an emergency and the mobile phone is
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
reachable:
not be applicable with the available mobile service and
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
area.
number for your area.
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
If the phone is not reachable and the Uconnect威 Phone is
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
“Setup”, followed by “Emergency”.
follows:
Emergency Assistance
• Press the
button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
• The Uconnect威 Phone does slightly lower your NOTE:
chances of successfully making a phone call as to that
• The roadside assistance number dialed is based on the
for the mobile phone directly.
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-528-2069
for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-14-3454 for
WARNING!
Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside Mexico City
in Mexico). Please refer to the “Roadside Assistance”
To use you Uconnect威 Phone System in an emercoverage details on the DVD in the Warranty Informagency, your mobile phone must be:
tion Booklet and the Roadside Assistance references.
• turned on,
• paired to the Uconnect威 System,
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
• and have network coverage.
some systems. To do this, press the
button and say
Roadside Assistance
If you need roadside assistance:
“Setup”, followed by “Roadside Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to “Working with Automated
Systems”. Paging works properly except for pagers of
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
“Roadside Assistance”.
work properly with the Uconnect威 Phone.
• Press the
button to begin.
3
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4 6 #), you
can press the
button and say, “3 7 4 6 # Send”.
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to “Working
Saying
a
number,
or
sequence of numbers, followed by
with Automated Systems”.
“Send”, is also to be used for navigating through an
Working With Automated Systems
automated customer service center menu structure, and
This method is used in instances where one generally has to leave a number on a pager.
to press numbers on the mobile phone keypad while You can also send stored Uconnect威 phonebook entries as
navigating through an automated telephone system.
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
You can use your Uconnect威 Phone to access a voice mail entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
button and say, “Send.” The
system or an automated service, such as a paging service call and then press the
system
will
prompt
you
to
enter
the name or number and
or automated customer service line. Some services resay
the
name
of
the
phonebook
entry you wish to send.
quire immediate response selection. In some instances,
The
Uconnect威
Phone
will
then
send the corresponding
that may be too quick for use of the Uconnect威 Phone.
phone number associated with the phonebook entry, as
When calling a number with your Uconnect威 Phone that tones over the phone.
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your mobile phone keypad, you can press the NOTE:
button and say the sequence you wish to enter, • You may not hear all of the tones due to mobile phone
followed by the word “Send”. For example, if required to
network configurations. This is normal.
Voice Mail Calling
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time • After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
one of the following:
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts On”
Barge In — Overriding Prompts
– “Setup Confirmation Prompts Off”
The “Voice Command” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
command immediately. For example, if a prompt is
asking “Would you like to pair a phone, clear a...,” you
button and say, “Pair a Phone” to
could press the
select that option without having to listen to the rest of
the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Phone And Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your mobile phone, the Uconnect威 Phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using Uconnect威 Phone. The status is given for network
signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system Dialing Using The Mobile Phone Keypad
from confirming your choices (e.g., the Uconnect威 Phone
You can dial a phone number with your mobile phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
keypad and still use the Uconnect威 Phone (while dialing
button to begin.
• Press the
via the mobile phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
3
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 mobile In order to mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s • Press the
button.
audio system. The Uconnect威 Phone will work the same
• Following the beep, say “Mute”.
as if you dial the number using Voice Command.
NOTE: Certain brands of mobile phones do not send the In order to un-mute the Uconnect威 Phone:
dial ring to the Uconnect威 Phone to play it on the vehicle • Press the
button.
audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this situation, after successfully dialing a number the user may feel • Following the beep, say “Mute off”.
that the call did not go through even though the call is in Advanced Phone Connectivity
progress. Once your call is answered, you will hear the
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute ON/OFF)
When you mute the Uconnect威 Phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you.
The Uconnect威 Phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your mobile phone to the Uconnect威 Phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your Uconnect威 Phone paired mobile phone to the
button and
Uconnect威 Phone or vice versa, press the
say “Transfer Call”.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect威 Phone And Mobile Phone
lowest priority. To “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the
button and say “Select” or “Delete”. Also, see the next two sections for an
alternate way to “Select” or “Delete” a paired phone.
Your mobile phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively “connected”
with one electronic device at a time.
Select Another Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威 This feature allows you to select and start using another
connection between your mobile phone and the Uconnect威 phone paired with the Uconnect威 Phone.
Phone System, follow the instructions described in your
button to begin.
• Press the
mobile phone User’s Manual.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
List Paired Mobile Phone Names
“Setup Select Phone” and follow the prompts.
• Press the
button to begin.
button at any time while the
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone that
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
you wish to select.
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
• When prompted, say “List Phones”.
• The Uconnect威 Phone will play the phone names of all
paired mobile phones in order from the highest to the
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
3
130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect威 Phone will return to using the highest Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect姞
priority phone present in or near (approximately Phone
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
Uconnect威 Phone Tutorial
Delete Uconnect威 Phone Paired Mobile Phones
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
• Press the
button to begin.
button and say “Uconnect威 Tutorial.”
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say Voice Training
“Setup Phone Pairing”.
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• At the next prompt, say “Delete” and follow the nizing their voice commands or numbers, the Uconnect威
Phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
prompts.
training mode, follow one of the two following procebutton at any time while the dures:
• You can also press the
list is being played, and then choose the phone you
From outside the Uconnect威 Phone mode (e.g., from
wish to delete.
radio mode):
• Press and hold the
the session begins, or,
button for five seconds until
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131
• Press the
button and say the “Voice Training”, This will delete all phone pairing, phone book entries,
“System Training”, or “Start Voice Training” com- and other settings in all language modes. The System will
prompt you before resetting to factory settings.
mand.
You can either press the Uconnect威 Phone button to Voice Command
restore the factory setting or repeat the words and
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
phrases when prompted by the Uconnect威 Phone. For
provide at least ½ in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
best results, the Voice Training session should be comconsole (if equipped) and the mirror.
pleted when the vehicle is parked with the engine
running, all windows closed, and the blower fan • Always wait for the beep before speaking.
switched off.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
you.
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Reset
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt, and the following beep, say
“Setup”, then “Reset”.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a Voice Command period.
• Performance is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
3
132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• Numbers must be spoken in single digits. “800” must
be spoken “eight-zero-zero” not “eight hundred”.
• You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
• When navigating through an automated system such
compromised with the convertible top down.
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
Far End Audio Performance
speaking the digit string, make sure to say “Send”.
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is • Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
not in motion is recommended.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding names
• low road noise,
in the Uconnect威 Phonebook.
• smooth road surface,
• Phonebook (Downloaded and Uconnect威 Phone Lo• fully closed windows,
cal) name recognition rate is optimized when the
entries are not similar.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
SMS
Uconnect威 Phone can read or send new messages on
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness your phone.
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and Read Messages:
not the Uconnect威 Phone.
If you receive a new text message while your phone is
• Echo at the phone far end can sometimes be reduced connected to Uconnect威 Phone, an announcement will be
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
made to notify you that you have a new text message.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be If you wish to hear the new message:
compromised with the convertible top down.
• Press the
button.
Recent Calls
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“SMS Read” or “Read Messages.”
If your phone supports “Automatic Phonebook Download”, Uconnect威 Phone can list your Outgoing, Incom- • Uconnect威 Phone will play the new text message for
ing and Missed Calls.
you.
After reading a message, you can “Reply” or “Forward”
the message using Uconnect威 Phone.
3
134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Send Messages:
3. Where are you?
You can send messages using Uconnect威 Phone. To send 4.
a new message:
5.
button.
• Press the
6.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
7.
“SMS Send” or “Send Message.”
8.
• You can either say the message you wish to send or say
9.
“List Messages.” There are 20 preset messages.
I need more direction.
LOL
Why
I love you
Call me
button while the 10.
To send a message, press the
system is listing the message and say “Send.”
11.
Uconnect威 Phone will prompt you to say the name or
12.
number of the person you wish to send the message to.
13.
List of Preset Messages:
14.
1. Yes
15.
2. No
Call me later
Thanks
See You in 15 minutes
I am on my way
I’ll be late
Are you there yet?
Where are we meeting?
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135
16. Can this wait?
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
17. Bye for now
Mobile phones have been found to lose connection to the
Uconnect威 Phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your mobile phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
18. When can we meet?
19. Send number to call
20. Start without me
Turn SMS Incoming Announcement ON/OFF
Power-Up
After switching the ignition from OFF to either the ON or
Turning the SMS Incoming Announcement OFF will stop ACC position, or after a language change, you must wait
the system from announcing the new incoming mes- at least fifteen seconds prior to using the system.
sages.
• Press the
button.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup, SMS Incoming Message Announcement,” you
will then be given a choice to change it.
3
136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137
3
138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
all
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
3
140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
help
home
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
other
pair a phone
phone pairing
pairing
phonebook
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate (s)
previous
record again
redial
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
Uconnect威 Tutorial
voice training
work
yes
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141
General Information
VOICE COMMAND — IF EQUIPPED
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and Voice Command System Operation
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
The Uconnect威 Voice Command system allows
you to control your AM, FM radio, disk player,
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
USB mass storage class device, iPOD family of
the party responsible for compliance could void the
devices, Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device,
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
satellite radio, disc player, and a memo recorder.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface Sys• This device must accept any interference received,
tem as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of the
including interference that may cause undesired opVoice Interface System to recognize user voice commands
eration.
may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a raised
voice level.
3
142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions following all applicable
laws. Your attention should be focused on safely
operating the vehicle. Failure to do so may result in a
collision causing serious injury or death.
Pressing the Voice Command
button while the
system is speaking is known as “barging in.” The system
will be interrupted, and after the beep, you can add or
change commands. This will become helpful once you
start to learn the options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help” or “Main Menu”.
button, you These commands are universal and can be used from any
When you press the Voice Command
will hear a beep. The beep is your signal to give a menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
command.
the active application.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
seconds, the system will present you with a list of a normal speaking volume.
options.
The system will best recognize your speech if the winIf you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists dows are closed, and the heater/air conditioning fan is
button, listen for set to low.
options, press the Voice Command
the beep, and say your command.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143
To hear the first available Menu, press the Voice Com- Main Menu
button and say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
mand
Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button. You may say “Main Menu” to switch to the
Commands
main menu.
The Voice Command system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all In this mode, you can say the following commands:
times. Local commands are available if the supported
• “Radio AM” (to switch to the radio AM mode)
radio mode is active.
• “Radio FM” (to switch to radio FM mode)
Changing the Volume
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the Voice Command
button.
• “USB” (to switch to USB mode)
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
• “Bluetooth Streaming” (to switch to Bluetooth威
Streaming mode)
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Com- • “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
mand system is speaking. Please note the volume
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
setting for Voice Command is different than the audio
system.
3
144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio AM
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
To switch to the AM band, say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In • “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
To switch to satellite radio mode, say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following com• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
mands:
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
Radio FM
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
To switch to the FM band, say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Frequency #” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Menu Radio” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145
Disc Mode
Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) Mode
To switch to the disc mode, say “Disc”. In this mode, you To switch to Bluetooth威 Streaming (BT) mode, say
may say the following commands:
“Bluetooth Streaming”. In this mode, you may say the
following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
• “List” (to list a Artist, Playlist, Album, Track, etc.)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Memo Mode
USB Mode
To switch to the voice recorder mode, say “Memo”. In
To switch to USB mode, say “USB”. In this mode, you
this mode, you may say the following commands:
may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
recording, you may press the Voice Command
button to stop recording. You proceed by saying
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
one of the following commands:
• “Play” (to play a Artist Name, Playlist Name, Album
– “Save” (to save the memo)
Name, Track Name, etc.)
– “Continue” (to continue recording)
3
146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
– “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Main menu setup” or
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos) —
During the playback you may press the Voice Combutton to stop playing memos. You promand
ceed by saying one of the following commands:
– “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
– “Next” (to play the next memo)
– “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
– “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Switch to setup”
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
• “Voice Training”
In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
• “Tutorial”
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the Voice
button first and wait for the beep before
Command
To switch to system setup, you may say one of the speaking the “Barge In” commands.
following:
Voice Training
• “Change to setup”
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recog• “Switch to system setup”
nizing their voice commands or numbers the Uconnect威
• “Change to setup”
Voice “Voice Training” feature may be used.
Setup
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147
1. Press the Voice Command
button, say “System SEATS
Setup” and once you are in that menu then say “Voice Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the
Training.” This will train your own voice to the system vehicle.
and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
Uconnect威 Voice. For best results, the “Voice Training”
session should be completed when the vehicle is
parked, engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The system will adapt to the
last trained voice only.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or
outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in
these areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
3
148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Power Seats — If Equipped
Some models may be equipped with a power driver’s
seat. The power seat switch is located on the outboard
side of the seat near the floor. Use the switch to move the
seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to tilt the seat.
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
CAUTION!
Power Seat Switch
Do not place any article under a power seat or
impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to
the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if
movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s
path.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149
Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.
Push the seat switch forward or rearward, the seat will
move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch
when the desired position has been reached.
On some models, the front driver and passenger seats
may be equipped with heaters in both the seat cushions
and seatbacks. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
You can choose from HIGH, LOW or OFF heat settings.
Amber indicator lights in each switch indicate the level of
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull
heat in use. Two indicator lights will illuminate for
upward or push downward on the seat switch, the seat
HIGH, one for LOW and none for OFF.
will move in the direction of the switch. Release the
Press the switch once to select HIGH-level
switch when the desired position is reached.
heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Tilting The Seat Up Or Down
LOW-level heating. Press the switch a third
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four
time to shut the heating elements OFF.
directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front
When the HIGH-level setting is selected, the heater will
or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat
provide a boosted heat level during the initial stages of
cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release
operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal
the switch when the desired position is reached.
HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LOW-level after approximately
Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down
3
150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
30 minutes of continuous operation. At that time, the
display will change from HI to LO, indicating the change.
When the LOW-level heating is selected, the system
automatically turns the heater and the indicator light
OFF after a maximum of 30 minutes of continuous
operation.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that
insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.
This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting
in a seat that has been overheated could cause
serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat.
Manual Front Seat Adjustment
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise care
when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
(Continued)
On models equipped with manual seats, the adjusting
bar is located at the front of the seats, near the floor.
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and move the
seat forward or rearward. Release the bar once you have
reached the desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be sure that
the seat adjusters have latched.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151
WARNING!
• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.
Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of
control which could cause a collision and serious
injury or death.
• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat
belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious
injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted
seat belt.
Manual Seat Adjusting Bar
3
152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
a lever, located on the outboard side of the seat. Pull
upward on the lever to raise the seat height or push
downward on the lever to lower the seat height.
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seatback. Rotate the lever downward
to increase the lumbar support or rotate the lever upward
to decrease the lumbar support.
Seat Height Adjustment Lever
Lumbar Adjustment Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153
Driver’s Seatback Recline
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on the
outboard side of the seat, lean back to the desired angle
and release the lever. To return the seatback, lift the lever,
lean forward and release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,
which could result in serious injury or death.
3
154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Fold-Flat Seat
Fold-Flat Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155
Head Restraints
Active Head Restraints — Front Seats
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury
by restricting head movement in the event of a rear
impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top
of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.
Active Head Restraints are passive, deployable components, and vehicles with this equipment cannot be readily
identified by any markings, only through visual inspection of the head restraint. The head restraint will be split
in two halves, with the front half being soft foam and
trim, the back half being decorative plastic.
WARNING!
The head restraints for all occupants must be properly adjusted prior to operating the vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted
or removed could cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
When AHRs deploy during a rear impact, the front half
of the head restraint extends forward to minimize the gap
between the back of the occupant’s head and the AHR.
This system is designed to help prevent or reduce the
extent of injuries to the driver and front passenger in
certain types of rear impacts. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
3
156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the push
button, located at the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint.
the back of your head, pull forward on the bottom of the
head restraint. Push rearward on the bottom of the head
restraint to move the head restraint away from your
head.
Push Button
Active Head Restraint (Normal Position)
For comfort the Active Head Restraints can be tilted
forward and backward. To tilt the head restraint closer to
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157
• In the event of deployment of an Active Head Restraint, refer to “Occupant Restraints/Resetting Active
Head Restraints (AHR)” in “Things To Know Before
Starting Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
Active Head Restraint (Tilted Position)
NOTE:
• The head restraints should only be removed by qualified technicians, for service purposes only. If either of
the head restraints require removal, see your authorized dealer.
3
• Do not place items over the top of the Active Head
Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable
DVD players. These items may interfere with the
operation of the Active Head Restraint in the event
of a collision and could result in serious injury or
death.
(Continued)
158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Active Head Restraints may be deployed if they are
struck by an object such as a hand, foot or loose
cargo. To avoid accidental deployment of the Active Head Restraint ensure that all cargo is secured,
as loose cargo could contact the Active Head Restraint during sudden stops. Failure to follow this
warning could cause personal injury if the Active
Head Restraint is deployed.
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to fold the rear
seatback flat.
Rear Head Restraints
The head restraints in the rear are non adjustable. Refer to
“Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for information on Tether routing.
Rear Seat Release Strap
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely locked into
position. If the seatback is not securely locked into
position the seat will not provide the proper stability
for child seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
Folded Rear Seat
To raise the seatback, pull the strap forward and lift the
seatback into its upright position.
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch. Then push the
seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees
maximum, and release the strap.
3
160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.
In a collision you could slide under the seat belt and
be seriously or even fatally injured. Use the recliner
only with the vehicle is parked.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.
Hood Release Lever
2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161
3
Hood Safety Latch Location
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the right side (left side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
Prop Rod Location
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open 8 in (20 cm)
approximately and then drop it. This should secure
(Continued)
162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the
hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
the passing lights, and the fog lights. The multifunction
lever is located on the left side of the steering column.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your
vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open
when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.
Failure to follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
Multifunction Lever
Headlights And Parking Lights
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights, to turn on the parking lights. Turn the end of the lever to
the second detent to turn on the headlights.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The high beam lights will come on as Daytime Running
Lights (lower intensity), whenever the ignition is ON, the
engine is running, the headlight switch is off, the parking
brake is off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in
any position except PARK.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are left on after the
ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the
driver when the driver’s door is opened.
Headlight Control
3
164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headThe front fog light switch is on the multifunction lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the turn off the fog lights.
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull out Turn Signals
the end of the multifunction lever.
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Front Fog Light Operation
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165
Lane Change Assist
Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond
the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash
three times then automatically turn off.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or will turn on the high beam headlights until the lever is
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside released.
light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 20 seconds, the high beams
defective.
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Turn Signal Operation
3
166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Instrument Panel Dimming
Rotate the center portion of the lever to the extreme
bottom position to fully dim the instrument panel lights
and prevent the interior lights from illuminating when a
door is opened.
Rotate the center portion of the lever up to increase the
brightness of the instrument panel lights when the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the next
detent position to brighten the odometer and radio when
the parking lights or headlights are on.
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the last
detent to turn on the interior lighting.
Dimmer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rear view mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
3
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, refer to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Wiper/Washer Control Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169
CAUTION!
• Turn the windshield wipers off when driving
through an automatic car wash. Damage to the
windshield wipers may result if the wiper control
is left in any position other than off.
• In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the “Park” position before turning off the engine. If the wiper
switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the
windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur
when the vehicle is restarted.
• Always remove any buildup of snow that prevents
the windshield wiper blades from returning to the
off position. If the windshield wiper control is
turned off and the blades cannot return to the off
position, damage to the wiper motor may occur.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent
past the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the lever upward to the third
detent past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
Windshield Wiper Operation
3
170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
while the lever is pulled and for two wipe cycles after the
lever is released, and then resume the intermittent interUse the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
val previously selected.
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the end of the lever will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
upward (clockwise) to decrease the delay time and
downward (counterclockwise) to increase the delay time.
WARNING!
The delay can be regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield
could lead to a collision. You might not see other
second.
vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of
NOTE: The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed. the windshield during freezing weather, warm the
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph (16 km/h),
windshield with the defroster before and during
delay times will be doubled.
windshield washer use.
Intermittent Wiper System
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low-speed
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171
Mist Feature
Push down on the control lever to activate a single wipe
to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from a
passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
3
NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the
windshield. The wash function must be used in order to
spray the windshield with washer fluid.
Mist Operation
TILT STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. The tilt steering column lever is
located on the left side of the steering column, below the
turn signal lever.
172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Push down on the lever to unlock the steering column.
With one hand firmly on the steering wheel, move the
steering column up or down, as desired. Push the lever
up to lock the steering column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driving.
Adjusting the steering column while driving or driving with the steering column unlocked, could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious injury or
death.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Column Lever
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173
NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Electronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut
down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at
the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control
System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic
Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
Electronic Speed Control Buttons
1 — ON/OFF
4 — CANCEL
2 — RES +
3 — SET -
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in
the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise
Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be
turned off when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
(Continued)
3
174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning the ignition switch OFF erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)
button and release. Resume can be used at any speed
Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle above 20 mph (32 km/h).
has reached the desired speed, press the SET (-) button
To Vary The Speed Setting
and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can inoperate at the selected speed.
crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button. If the button
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed is continually pressed, the set speed will continue to
and on level ground before pressing the SET (-) button. increase until the button is released, then the new set
speed will be established.
To Deactivate
To Set A Desired Speed
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL Pressing the RES (+) button once will result in a 1 mph
button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the (1.6 km/h) increase in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without the button results in an increase of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
set, push the SET (-) button. If the button is continually
held in the SET (-) position, the set speed will continue to
decrease until the button is released. Release the button
when the desired speed is reached, and the new set speed
will be established.
Pressing the SET (-) button once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) decrease in set speed. Each subsequent tap of
the button results in a decrease of 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the
vehicle set speed.
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control and have an accident. Do not use
Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads
that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
3
176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three hand-held transmitters
that operate devices such as garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink威 unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons, located on either the overhead
console, headliner or sunvisor, designate the three different HomeLink威 channels. The HomeLink威 indicator is
located above the center button.
HomeLink威 Buttons/Overhead Consoles
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177
For more efficient programming and accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that
a new battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of
the device that is being programmed to the HomeLink威
system.
Erase all channels before you begin programming. To
erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN
position and press and hold the two outside HomeLink威
buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds or until the red
indicator flashes.
NOTE:
HomeLink威 Buttons/Sunvisor/Headliner
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
• Erasing all channels should only be performed when
programming HomeLink威 for the first time. Do not
erase channels when programming additional buttons.
• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of the garage
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
before you begin programming.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink姞
3
178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that were manufactured after 1995. These garage door openers can be
identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located
where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door
opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of the
button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
Firmly press and release the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. On some garage door openers/devices
there may be a light that blinks when the garage door
opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威 NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
button you want to program and the hand-held trans- step after the LEARN button has been pressed.
mitter button.
6. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indiseconds each time). If the garage door opener/device
cator light. The HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly
activates, programming is complete.
and then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the
frequency signal from the hand-held transmitter. ReNOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not actilease both buttons after the indicator light changes
vate, press the button a third time (for two seconds) to
from slow to rapid.
complete the training.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is erase the channels.
attached to the garage door opener/device motor.
3
180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to proTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
gram while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
follow these steps:
view.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the HomeLink威
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
button you want to program and the hand-held transthe EVIC displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do not
mitter button.
release the button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe the indi3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programcator light. HomeLink威 indicator will flash slowly and
ming A Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all remaining
then rapidly after HomeLink威 has received the fresteps.
quency signal from the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons after the indicator light changes from
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
slow to rapid.
For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured
before 1995.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
• To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Programming A Non-Rolling Code” Step 2 and follow all
remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/United States
that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after
several seconds of transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of transTo reprogram a channel that has been previously trained, mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink威
follow these steps:
to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
time-out in the same manner.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
not release the button.
door or gate motor.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
3
182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to 3 in (3 to 8 cm)
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while keeping the HomeLink威 indicator light in
view.
• If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is complete and the garage door/device should
activate when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
• To program the two remaining HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button,
while you press and release (“cycle”), your hand-held
transmitter every two seconds until HomeLink威 has If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for
successfully accepted the frequency signal. The indi- programming, plug it back in at this time.
cator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威 Button
fully trained.
To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,
4. Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash
follow these steps:
rates. When it changes, it is programmed. It may take
up to 30 seconds or longer in rare cases. The garage 1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.
door may open and close while you are programming.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do
5. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink威 button
not release the button.
and observe the indicator light.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183
3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Canadian/ The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and follow all the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
remaining steps.
Troubleshooting Tips
Using HomeLink姞
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
To operate, press and release the programmed are some of the most common solutions:
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the • Replace the battery in the original hand-held transmitprogrammed device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operater.
tor, security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.,). The hand-held transmitter of the device may • Press the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
also be used at any time.
• Did you unplug the device for programming and
Security
remember to plug it back in?
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
in your vehicle.
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for 20 www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
3
184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,
pets or other objects are in the path of the door or
gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door
opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This includes
most garage door opener models manufactured
after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without
these safety features. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.HomeLink.com for
safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas
can cause serious injury or death.
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with FCC
and IC rules. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the device.
• The term IC before the certification/registration number only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead
console.
Power Sunroof Switch
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in
the ignition switch (or with the ignition in the
Accessory or Run position, for vehicles equipped
with Keyless Enter-N-Go™). Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped
by the power sunroof while operating the power
sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could
also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are also properly secured.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any
object, to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
3
186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Opening Sunroof — Express
Press the switch rearward and release it within one-half
second and the sunroof will open automatically from any
position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automatically. This is called “Express Open”. During Express
Open operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially
opened condition until the switch is pushed and held
rearward again.
Close operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially closed
condition until the switch is pushed and held forward
again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of the
sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction
in the path of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if this occurs.
Next, press the switch forward and release to Express
Closing Sunroof — Express
Press the switch forward and release it within one-half Close.
second and the sunroof will close automatically from any NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result
position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati- in Pinch Protect reversals, the fourth close attempt will be
cally. This is called “Express Close”. During Express a Manual Close movement with Pinch Protect disabled.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and release the Vent button within one half second
and the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is
called “Express Vent”, and it will occur regardless of
sunroof position. During Express Vent operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
the glass panel.
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
Ignition Off Operation
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
For Vehicles Not Equipped With The Electronic Vehicle
open.
Information Center (EVIC)
Wind Buffeting
The power sunroof switch will remain active for 45 secWind buffeting can be described as the perception of
onds after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
feature.
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
3
188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
For Vehicles Equipped With The EVIC
The power sunroof switch will remain active for up to
approximately ten minutes after the ignition switch is
turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlet located
in the instrument panel for added convenience. This
power outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and
other low power devices.
12 Volt Power Outlet
Power is available when the ignition switch is in the ON
or ACC position. Insert the cigar lighter or accessory plug
into the outlet for use. To preserve the heating element,
do not hold the lighter in the heating position.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189
NOTE: To ensure proper operation a MOPAR威 knob and
element must be used.
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts
(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watt (13 Amp)
power rating is exceeded the fuse protecting the
system will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs
only. Do not insert any other object in the power
outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the
fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
3
Power Outlet Fuse Location
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet
should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.
(Continued)
190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the
vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent the engine from starting.
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115 Volt (150 Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
front of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power mobile phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in overload
protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,
the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once
the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power inverter
may have to be reset manually. To reset the inverter
manually, unplug the device and plug it in again. To
avoid overloading the circuit, check the power ratings on
electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
3
115 Volt Power Outlet
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
(Continued)
192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric
shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or
prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
CUPHOLDERS
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are
two illuminated cupholders located in the front.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193
There are two cupholders located in the back for the rear
passengers.
3
Front Cupholders
Rear Cupholders
194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
STORAGE
Glove Compartment And Storage Bin
Located on the passenger side of the instrument panel are
an upper storage bin and a lower glove compartment.
Storage Bins
1 — Upper Storage Bin
2 — Lower Glove Compartment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195
To open the lower glove compartment, pull outward on Door Storage
the release handle.
The interior door panels are equipped with lower storage
areas.
3
Glove Compartment
Front Door Storage
196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To open the upper storage compartment, push inward on
the upper handle to unlatch the upper lid and lift the lid
open.
Rear Door Storage
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console contains both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
Upper Storage Compartment
To open the lower storage compartment, lift upward on
the lower handle to unlatch the lower storage compartment and lift the lid open.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197
WARNING! (Continued)
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight
Lower Storage Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Cellular phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
(Continued)
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.
3
198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Three Press Switch
Flashlight Location/Press To Release
Cargo Cover
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high, The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommodates the reclining rear seat.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.
3
Cargo Cover Guides
WARNING!
Rear Trim Notches
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.
In a collision a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
(Continued)
200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water.
Removable Load Floor
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are four tie-downs (D-rings) installed in the cargo
area for securing cargo.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201
WARNING!
Cargo Area Tie-Downs
• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle
handling. To avoid loss of control resulting in
personal injury, follow these guidelines for loading
your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as possible.
(Continued)
3
202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed weight
over or behind the rear axle can cause the rear of
the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The rear
cargo space is intended for load carrying purposes
only, not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
Fold Down Speakers
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
Rotate the center portion of the lever upward to the
first detent position for rear wiper operation.
NOTE: The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode
The rear wiper/washer is controlled by a rotary switch
only.
located on the center portion of the control lever. The control
lever is located on the right side of the steering column.
Rotate the center portion of the lever past the first
detent to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump and the wiper will continue to operate as long as
the switch is held (for a maximum of 10 seconds). Upon
release, the wiper will continue to cycle two times before
returning to the set position.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control Lever
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door, if this
happens the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “park”.
3
204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Defroster
The rear window defroster button is located on
the bottom right-side of the blower control knob.
Press this button to turn on the rear window defroster
and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will illuminate when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically
turns off after approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of operation, press the button a
second time.
NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear
window defroster only when the engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to
the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of the rear
window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth
and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after
soaking with warm water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface of the
window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205
crossbar to the desired position, keeping the crossbars
parallel to the rack frame. Once the crossbar is in one of
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
the seven detent positions, retighten the thumb screws to
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
lock the crossbar into position.
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
NOTE:
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: If not equipped with crossbars, your authorized • To help control wind noise when the crossbars are not
in use, place the front crossbar in the first detent from
dealer can order and install MOPAR威 crossbars built
the front of the vehicle and the rear crossbar in the
specifically for this roof rack system.
second detent from the rear of the vehicle.
Distribute cargo weight evenly on the roof rack crossbars.
The roof rack does not increase the total load carrying • If the rear crossbar (or any metallic object) is placed
over the satellite radio antenna (if equipped), you may
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure the total load of cargo
experience interruption of satellite radio reception. For
inside the vehicle plus that on the external rack does not
improved satellite radio reception, place the rear crossexceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
bar in the second detent from the rear of the vehicle
The optional crossbars must also be secured in one of the
when not in use.
seven detent positions marked with an arrow on the
siderails to prevent movement. To move the crossbars, • The grab handles on the back of the vehicle (if
equipped) are not to be used as a towing feature.
loosen the thumb screws located at the upper edge of
each crossbar approximately eight turns, then move the
3
206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• To prevent damage to the roof of your vehicle, DO
NOT carry any loads on the roof rack without
crossbars installed. The load should be secured and
placed on top of the crossbars, not directly on the
roof. If it is necessary to place the load on the roof,
place a blanket or some other protection between
the load and the roof surface.
• To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150 lb
(68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly as
possible and secure the load appropriately.
• Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, or loads with large
frontal area should be secured to both the front and
rear of the vehicle.
• Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof
rack. Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby
truck traffic, can add sudden upward lift to a load.
This is especially true on large flat loads and may
result in damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
(Continued)
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES. . . . . . . . . . .210
▫ Average Fuel Economy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .211
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
䡵 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS . . . . .212
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM). . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
䡵 MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .226
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
▫ Control Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
䡵 ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION
CENTER (EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . .228 䡵 Uconnect威 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER
▫ Engine Oil Change Indicator System —
(MP3/WMA AUX JACK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . .232
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . . .239
4
208 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD
䡵 UCONNECT威 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO) . . .248
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . .
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files. . . . . . . . .250
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE For
▫ LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA
CD And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
▫ Notes on Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . .
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .253
䡵 UCONNECT威 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO .
▫ Uconnect威 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .255
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode. . . . .
䡵 Uconnect威 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/
▫ Operation Instructions — CD MODE for
HDD/NAV — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
CD and MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Voice Command
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . .
System) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
▫ LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . .
▫ Operating Instructions (Uconnect威 Phone) —
If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .259
. .260
. .269
. .263
. .265
. .268
. .269
. .269
. .275
. .278
. .280
▫ INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play) . . . . . .280
▫ Uconnect威 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped. . . .255
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 209
䡵 iPod威/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .286 䡵 CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .294
▫ Connecting The iPod威 Or External USB
䡵 RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
䡵 CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Using This Feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning . . .
▫ Controlling The iPod威 Or External
▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
USB Device Using Radio Buttons . . . . . . . . . .287
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Play Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ List Or Browse Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
▫ Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA) . . . . . . . . .291
䡵 STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS . . . . . .293
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .293
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
. . .295
. . .295
. . .296
. . .300
. . .306
4
210 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
— Air Outlet
— Demisters
— Instrument Cluster
— Radio
5
6
7
8
—
—
—
—
Storage Bin
Glove Compartment
Climate Controls
Power Outlet
9 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
10 — Hazard Warning Flasher
11 — ESC OFF Switch – If Equipped
12 — Heated Seat Switch – If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 211
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
4
212 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge/Fuel Door Reminder
When the ignition switch is in the ON/RUN
position, the pointer will show the level of fuel
remaining in the fuel tank. The fuel pump
symbol points to the side of the vehicle where
the fuel door is located.
2. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on
while driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting
Procedures” in “What To Do In Emergencies”.
3. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned to ON/RUN and remain
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 213
on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on 6. Speedometer
during starting, have the system checked by an authoThe Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
rized dealer.
hour (MPH) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
4. Oil Pressure Warning Light
7. Air Bag Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
This light will turn on for four to eight seconds
light should turn on momentarily when the engine is
as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
turned to ON/RUN. If the light is either not on
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
chime will sound when this light turns on.
driving, have the system inspected at an authorized
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. dealer as soon as possible. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
This light does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
further information.
5. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
8. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated. If the
4
214 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
turn signal on, a continuous chime will sound to alert indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
you to turn the signals off.
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
NOTE: If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
for a defective outside light bulb.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
9. High Beam Indicator
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
This indicator shows that the high beam head- brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
lights are on. Push the multifunction lever for- ignition switch is turned to the ON/RUN position, have
ward to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
toward yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
11. Seat Belt Reminder Light
10. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light — If Equipped
When the ignition switch is first turned to ON/
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight
seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON/RUN position and the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound.
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver or
front passenger’s seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will illuminate and the chime
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 215
will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the veinformation.
hicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
12. Tachometer
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range. Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
14. Brake Warning Light
prevent engine damage.
This light monitors various brake functions,
13. Engine Temperature Warning Light
including brake fluid level and parking brake
This light warns of an overheated engine condiapplication. If the brake light turns on it may
tion. As engine coolant temperatures rise and the
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold. the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
pass H, a continuous chime will occur until the engine is
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
allowed to cool or the 4 minutes duration is expired, master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
whichever come first.
hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the
4
216 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necesSystem (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. sary.
In this case, the light will remain on until the condition
has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
WARNING!
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake
and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop. Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac- It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has (ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
dropped below a specified level.
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditurning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for apthe brake fluid level checked.
proximately two seconds. The light should then turn off
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 217
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light
inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
15. Transmission Temperature Warning Light
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission Temperature Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause
severe transmission damage or transmission failure.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when the
Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in
contact with hot engine or exhaust components and
cause a fire.
This light indicates that the transmission fluid
temperature is running hot. This may occur
with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this
light turns on, safely pull over and stop them 16. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxirun the engine at idle or faster until the light turns off.
mately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
4
218 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
until the vehicle is disarmed. The light will also turn on
for about three seconds when the ignition is first turned
to ON/ RUN.
17. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads
“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle
(Continued)
CAUTION! (Continued)
with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H” and you hear continuous chimes,
turn the engine off immediately and call an authorized dealer for service.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer
for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to
look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your
Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 219
18. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
21. Odometer/Trip Odometer Display Reset Button
This indicator shows that the Electronic Speed Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
Control System is ON.
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
19. 4WD Indicator Light
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
This light indicates the vehicle is in 4WD Locked mode. to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
reset.
20. Shift Lever Indicator
If the vehicle is equipped with the optional Electronic
The Shift Lever Indicator is self-contained within the
Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument
instrument cluster. It displays the gear position of the
cluster, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center —
automatic transmission.
If Equipped” for further information.
NOTE: You must apply the brakes before shifting from
PARK.
4
220 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
22. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 221
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
23. Odometer Display / Trip Odometer Display
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven.
NOTE: U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been
driven. If your odometer needs to be repaired or serviced,
the repair technician should leave the odometer reading
the same as it was before the repair or service. If s/he
cannot do so, then the odometer must be set at zero, and
a sticker must be placed in the door jamb stating what the
mileage was before the repair or service. It is a good idea
for you to make a record of the odometer reading before
the repair/service, so that you can be sure that it is
properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if
the odometer must be reset at zero.
4
222 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Vehicle Odometer Messages
gASCAP
When the appropriate conditions exist, the following If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
odometer messages will display:
filler cap is loose, improperly installed, or damaged, a
“gASCAP” message will display in the odometer display
door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Door Ajar area. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and press the
TRIP ODOMETER button to turn off the message. If the
gATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gate Ajar problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started.
gASCAP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fuel Cap Fault
LoW tirE
LoW tirE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Low Tire Pressure When tire pressure is low, the odometer display will
toggle between LoW and tirE for three cycles.
CHANgE OIL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Oil Change Required
CHANgE OIL Message
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the inindicator system. The “CHANgE OIL” message will flash
strument cluster, warnings such as “Door Ajar”, and
in the instrument cluster odometer display for approxi“Gate Ajar” will be displayed in the EVIC display. For
mately 12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to
additional information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Inforindicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The
mation Center — If Equipped”.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 223
engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style. Unless
reset, this message will continue to display each time you
turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. To turn
off the message temporarily, press and release the Trip
Odometer button on the instrument cluster. To reset the
oil change indicator system (after performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the following procedure:
24. OFF ROAD Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the 4WD lock
switch is activated and the shift lever is in LOW or
REVERSE position.
25. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II that
monitors emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. The light will illuminate when
Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position. Do
the
key
is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
not start the engine.
the light does not come on when turning the key from
Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked promptly.
within 10 seconds.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap,
Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the light after
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
not require towing.
4
224 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause damage to the engine control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and drivability. If the MIL is flashing,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss will
soon occur. Immediate service is required.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced
above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal
operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances such as dry
plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in death
or serious injury to the driver, occupants or others.
26. Hill Descent Indicator — If Equipped
The symbol illuminates (is armed) when the
4WD Lock switch is activated and the transmission range indicator is in LOW or REVERSE
position (Off-Road Mode).
27. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator will illuminate when the front fog
lights are on.
28. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This light indicates the Electronic Stability
Control system (ESC) has been turned off by
the driver.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 225
29. Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light — If Equipped
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC
system will be ON, even if it was turned off previously.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition switch is turned to the
ON/RUN position. It should go out with the
engine running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see
your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the
problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
NOTE:
30. 4WD! Warning Light
This light monitors the 4-Wheel Drive (4WD)
system. The light will come on, for a bulb
check, when the ignition key is turned to the
ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long
as three seconds.
When lit solid: There is an 4WD system fault. 4WD
performance will be at a reduced level . Service the 4WD
system soon.
The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” come on momentarily each When blinking: The 4WD system is temporarily disabled due to overload condition.
time the ignition switch is turned to ON/RUN.
4
226 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
31. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Display — If Equipped
Control Buttons
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
For further information, refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)”.
MINI-TRIP COMPUTER — IF EQUIPPED
The Mini-Trip Computer is located in the instrument
cluster and features a driver-interactive trip information
and temperature display.
NOTE: The system will display the last known outside
temperature when starting the vehicle and may need to
be driven several minutes before the updated temperature is displayed. Engine temperature can also affect the
displayed temperature; therefore, temperature readings
are not updated when the vehicle is not moving.
Mini-Trip Control Buttons
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 227
STEP Button
Trip Odometer (ODO)
Press the STEP button located on the steering wheel to This display shows the distance traveled since the last
scroll through sub menus (i.e., Temperature, Trip Func- reset. Press and release the STEP button on the instrutions: Odometer, Trip A, Trip B).
ment cluster to switch from odometer, to Trip A or Trip B.
RESET Button
Trip A
To reset the display shown, turn the ignition switch to the Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A since the last
ON position, then press and hold the RESET button reset.
located on the steering wheel.
Trip B
The following displays can be reset or changed:
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B since the last
• Trip A
reset.
• Trip B
4
228 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — IF EQUIPPED
The EVIC consists of the following:
• System Status
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the • Units
instrument cluster.
• Vehicle Information Warning Message Displays
• Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)
• Compass Heading
• Outside Temperature Display
• Trip Computer Functions
• Uconnect威 phone Displays (if equipped)
• Audio Mode Display
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
The system allows the driver to select information by
pressing the following buttons mounted on the steering
wheel:
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 229
COMPASS Button
Press and release the COMPASS button to
display one of eight compass readings and the
outside temperature or to exit sub-menus.
SELECT Button
Press and release the SELECT button for access
to main menus, sub-menus or to select a personal setting in the setup menu.
DOWN Button
EVIC Steering Wheel Buttons
MENU Button
Press and release the DOWN button to scroll
downward through the sub-menus.
Press and release the MENU button to scroll
through the main menus (Fuel Economy, Warn- When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
ings, Timer, Units, System, Personal Settings) the following messages:
or to exit sub-menus.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
4
230 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Left Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Gate (with vehicle graphic showing the Liftgate open
and A single chime )
• Left Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime)
• Headlamps or Park Lamps On
• Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single
chime)
• Remote Start Aborted — Door Ajar
• Right Rear Turn Signal Lamp Out (with a single chime) • Remote Start Aborted — Hood Ajar
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Remote Start Aborted — L/Gate Ajar
• Personal Settings Not Avail. — Vehicle not in PARK • Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
(automatic transmission) or vehicle is in motion
• Remote Start Aborted — System Fault
(manual transmission).
• Key In Ignition
• Door Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which door is
open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in • Low Tire
motion).
• Low Tire Pressure Display for Premium TPM System
• Doors Ajar (with vehicle graphic showing which doors
• Service TPM System
are open. A single chime sounds if the vehicle is in
motion).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 231
Engine Oil Change Indicator System — If
Equipped
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
Oil Change Required
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal, slowly, three times
within 10 seconds.
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message
will flash in the EVIC display for approximately five
seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty-cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance) refer to the following procedure.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary repeat this procedure.
EVIC Functions
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
• Units In
• Elapsed Time
4
232 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
To Reset The Display
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
Pressing and holding the SELECT button once will clear history information will be erased, and the averaging will
the function currently being displayed. Reset will only continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
occur if a resettable function is currently being displayed.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
To reset all resettable functions, press and release the
SELECT button a second time within three seconds of Shows the estimated distance that can be traveled with
resetting the currently displayed function. Reset ALL will the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
be displayed during this three-second window.
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
Compass/Temperature/Audio
tank level. This is not resettable.
Press and release the COMPASS button to display one of
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
eight compass headings to indicate the direction the
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
vehicle is facing, the outside temperature, and the current
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
radio station.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 233
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Elapsed time can be reset by pressing and holding the
SELECT button (as prompted in the EVIC display). Upon
reset all digits will change to zeros and time will start
incrementing again if the ignition switch is in RUN or
START.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
Refer to “Starting And Operating”, “Tire Pressure Moni- This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
toring System (TPMS)” for system operation.
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmission).
Elapsed Time
Press and release the MENU or DOWN buttons until
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset.
“Personal Settings” is displayed in the EVIC then press
Elapsed time will increment when the ignition switch is
the SELECT button.
in the RUN/START position.
Use the SELECT button to display one of the following
Elapsed time is displayed as follows:
choices:
hours:minutes:seconds
4
234 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Language
Auto Unlock On Exit
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the SELECT button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, Deutsch, Italiano, Francais or NL depending on availability. As you continue, the displayed
information will be shown in the selected language.
When ON is selected, all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened, if the vehicle is
stopped (manual transmission) or the vehicle is stopped
and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position (automatic transmission). Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
NOTE: Uconnect威 language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” in Uconnect威 RKE Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
phone — If Equipped for details.
When Driver’s Door 1st is selected only the driver’s door
will unlock on the first press of the Remote Keyless Entry
Auto Lock Doors
(RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and require a second
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
press to unlock the remaining locked doors. When Rethe speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
mote Unlock All Doors is selected, all of the doors will
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
unlock at the first press of the RKE transmitter UNLOCK
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
button. Press and hold the SELECT button when in this
display until “Driver’s Door 1st” or “All Doors” appears
to make your selection.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 235
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the SELECT
button when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
to make your selection.
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or Key Off Power Delay
without the sound horn with lock feature selected. Press
When this feature is selected the power window
and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
switches, radio, Uconnect威 phone, power sunroof, and
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
Sound Horn with Lock
after the ignition switch has been turned OFF. Opening
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when either front vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature and hold the SELECT button when in this display until
may be selected with or without the Flash Lights with “OFF”, “45 sec.”, “5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make
Lock feature. Press and hold the SELECT button when in your selection.
Flash Lamps with Lock
this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to make your Illuminated Approach
selection.
When this feature is selected the headlights will activate
Headlamp Off Delay
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
When this feature is selected the driver can choose to unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
4
236 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SELECT button when in this display until “OFF”, “30 Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
sec.”, “60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your When ON is selected, all voice commands from the
selection.
Uconnect威 system are confirmed. Press and hold the
SELECT button when in this display until “ON” or
Hill Start Assist (HSA) — If Equipped
“OFF” appears to make your selection.
When on is selected, the HSA system is active. Refer to
“Electronic Brake Control System” in “Starting And Automatic Compass Calibration
Operating” for system function and operating informa- This compass is self-calibrating, which eliminates the
tion. To make your selection, press and release the need to set the compass manually. When the vehicle is
SELECT button until “On” or “Off” appears.
new, the compass may appear erratic and the EVIC will
display “CAL” until the compass is calibrated. You may
also calibrate the compass by completing one or more
The EVIC, odometer, and Uconnect威 gps system units
360–degree turns (in an area free from large metal or
can be changed between English and Metric.
metallic objects) until the “CAL” message displayed in
Press and hold the SELECT button when in this display the EVIC turns off. The compass will now function
until “ENGLISH” or “METRIC” appears to make your normally.
selection.
Display Units In
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 237
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and 4. Press and release the SELECT button to start the
calibration. The “CAL” indicator will display in the
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
EVIC.
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc.
5. Complete one or more 360–degree turns (in an area
free from large metal or metallic objects) until the
Manual Compass Calibration
“CAL” indicator turns off. The compass will now
If the compass appears erratic and the “CAL” indicator
function normally.
does not appear in the EVIC display, you must put the
compass into the Calibration Mode manually as follows: Compass Variance
1. Start the engine. Leave the shift lever in PARK in order Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To compensate for the
to enter the EVIC Programming Menus.
differences, the variance should be set for the zone where
2. Press the MENU button until the Personal Settings
the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly
(Customer-Programmable Features) menu displays in
set, the compass will automatically compensate for the
the EVIC.
differences and provide the most accurate compass head3. Press the DOWN button until “Calibrate Compass” ing.
displays in the EVIC.
4
238 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Magnetic materials should be kept away from 1. Turn the ignition switch ON.
the top of the right rear quarter window. This is where
2. Press and hold the COMPASS button for approxithe compass sensor is located.
mately two seconds.
3. Press the DOWN button until “Compass Variance”
message and the last variance zone number displays
in the EVIC.
4. Press and release the SELECT button until the proper
variance zone is selected according to the map.
5. Press and release the COMPASS button to exit.
Compass Variance Map
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 239
Uconnect姞 230 — AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND
6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK)
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
Uconnect威 230
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
4
240 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SEEK Buttons
Voice Command Button Uconnect威 Phone —
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next If Equipped
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio (if equipped). Refer to “Voice Command” for further
will remain tuned to the new station until you make details.
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
stations without stopping, until you release it.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
SCAN Button
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Phone Button Uconnect威 Phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further
details.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 241
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button and
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in this
display follow the above procedure, starting at step 2.
and frequency display.
INFO Button
Clock Setting Procedure
TIME Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
SCROLL control knob.
RW/FF
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/ Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
will begin to blink.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/ or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL con- TUNE Control
trol knob to save the time change.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds. to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
4
242 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the front and rear speakers.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the MUSIC TYPE Button
mid-range tones.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
treble tones.
Music Type information.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the format types:
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 243
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
4
244 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is • DISC Play/Pause displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
You can toggle between playing the DVD and
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
pausing the DVD by pushing the SELECT
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
button (if equipped).
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be • DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
SETUP Button
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are available on the disc (if equipped).
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
the disc) (if equipped).
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
•
Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
select an entry and make changes.
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
equipped).
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 245
• Player Defaults -Selecting this item will allow the user
to scroll through the following items and set defaults
• The available selections for each of the above entries
according to customer preference.
varies depending upon the disc.
• These selections can only be made while playing a DVD. Menu Language — If Equipped
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and OFF Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
(if equipped).
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
(if equipped).
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
• VES™ CH1/CH2 -Allows the user to change the mode SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by number and then push to select.
NOTE:
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock -Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
4
246 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down Audio DRC — If Equipped
to select the number and then push to select.
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
to select the number and then push to select.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
Subtitles — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
Off or On.
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 247
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
When you are receiving a station that you wish to button number will display.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button. Buttons 1 - 6
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
and press and release that button. If a button is not
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
4
248 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
DISC Button
CAUTION! (Continued)
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
(Continued)
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 249
CAUTION!
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton CD and MP3/MWA modes.
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and SCAN Button (CD MODE)
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is CD currently playing.
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
4
250 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited. • Maximum number of files: 255
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the • Maximum number of folders: 100
following restrictions.
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Supported Media (Disc Types)
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeDVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
character extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 251
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
24, 22.05, 16
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
4
252 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WMA Specification
WMA
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
44.1 and 48
Bit Rate (kbps)
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
48, 64, 96, 128,
160, 192 VBR
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title • Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
before writing to the disc.
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 253
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilthe following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
time⬙ priority mode.
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or down.
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
No function.
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
4
254 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Command System
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will Refer to “Video Entertainment System (VES)™” for further details.
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
Dolby威
No function.
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
Dolby威 and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 255
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
DTS™
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a wel“DTS™ and “DTS™ 2.0” are trademarks of Digital The- come kit that contains general information, including
ater Systems, Inc.
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
Uconnect姞 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcast- www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
4
256 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Selecting Uconnect威 (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
Please have the following information available when A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite
calling:
radio mode.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Satellite Antenna
Number (ESN/SID).
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
ESN/SID Access
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC posion or above the antenna.
tion and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is Reception Quality
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number following reasons:
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
the radio to exit this screen.
structure or under a physical obstacle.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 257
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
SCAN Button
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before concause signal blockage.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 (Satellite)
button a second time.
Mode
INFO Button
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informaACC position to operate the radio.
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if availSEEK Buttons
able). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next additional three seconds will make the radio display the
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will to normal display).
4
258 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
TUNE Control (Rotary)
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
SETUP Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
MUSIC TYPE Button
following items:
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type • Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
seconds will allow the program format type to be seSirius subscription.
lected.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
type.
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
RW/FF
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 259
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Uconnect姞 730N/430/430N CD/DVD/HDD/NAV —
IF EQUIPPED
Refer to your Uconnect威 user’s manual for detailed
operating instructions.
Operating Instructions (Voice Command System)
— If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Command” for further details.
Operating Instructions (Uconnect姞 Phone) —
If Equipped
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” for further details.
4
260 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
UCONNECT姞 130
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
Uconnect威 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
position to operate the radio.
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 261
another selection. Holding either button will bypass 5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
stations without stopping, until you release it.
RW/FF
TIME Button
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
and radio frequency.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Clock Setting Procedure
TUNE Control
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/ to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
SCROLL control knob.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
will begin to blink.
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to save time change.
4
262 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
AM/FM Button
mid-range tones.
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the Memory
treble tones.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/ button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
the front and rear speakers.
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 263
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
button number will display.
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
Buttons 1 - 6
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
stations).
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
DISC Button
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
4
264 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
(Continued)
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 265
SEEK Button
AM/FM Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
TIME Button
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display. Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
RW/FF
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 file
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) recording media and formats are limited. When writing
MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
button works in a similar manner.
4
266 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660 • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeWhen reading discs recorded using formats other than
character extension)
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threefiles properly and may be unable to play the file norcharacter extension)
mally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers longer disc loading times.
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 267
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling Frequency (kHz)
48, 44.1, 32
Bit Rate (kbps)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32,
24, 16, 8
MPEG-2 Audio
24, 22.05, 16
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
Layer
3
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
VBR bit rate.
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
268 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
Playback of MP3 Files
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
by the following:
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
CD-R media
vehicle speakers.
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
to load than non-multisession discs
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 269
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the UCONNECT姞 130 WITH SATELLITE RADIO
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
4
Uconnect威 130
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
270 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second Voice Command System (Radio) — If Equipped
time to turn off the radio.
Refer to “Voice Command” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously Voice Command Button Uconnect威 Phone — If
(360 degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turn- Equipped
ing the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
the volume, and to the left decreases it.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “UnderWhen the audio system is turned on, the sound will be standing The Features If Your Vehicle”.
set at the same volume level as last played.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
SEEK Buttons
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 271
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
Press this button to operate the Uconnect威 Phone feature
will begin to blink.
(if equipped). Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “Understanding The Features If Your Vehicle”.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL conIf your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
trol knob to save time change.
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With Uconnect
Phone” message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
Phone Button Uconnect威 Phone — If Equipped
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
Press the TIME button to alternate display of the time
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
and radio frequency.
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
Clock Setting Procedure
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
procedure, starting at Step 2.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
TIME Button
4
272 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
mid-range tones.
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
RW/FF
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the treble tones.
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
AM or FM frequencies.
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
TUNE Control
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise sound level from the right or left side speakers.
INFO Button
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency. Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS the front and rear speakers.
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 273
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or
undefined
Adult Hits
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Program Type
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
16-Digit Character
Display
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
4
274 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Program Type
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Adjust the hours by turning the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob. After adjusting the
hours, press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to set
the minutes. The minutes will begin to blink. Adjust
the minutes using the right side TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
save time change.
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The AM/FM Button
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 275
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1–6) you wish to lock onto this
station and press and release that button. If a button is
not selected within five seconds after pressing the SET/
RND button, the station will continue to play but will not
be stored into pushbutton memory.
Buttons 1 - 6
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
4
276 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• The Uconnect威 130 is a single CD player. Do not
attempt to insert a second CD if one is already
loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they can
cause damage to the player.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 277
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within RW/FF
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed, Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
works in a similar manner.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
AM/FM Button
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
TIME Button
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop RanPress this button to change the display from a large CD
dom Play.
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
4
278 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3 • Maximum number of folder levels: 8
file recording media and formats are limited. When
• Maximum number of files: 255
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
Supported Media (Disc Types)
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
display.)
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than • Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threeISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
character extension)
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 279
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio. use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal VBR bit rates.
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
MPEG
Sampling FreDiscs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
Bit Rate (kbps)
Specification
quency (kHz)
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
MPEG-1 Audio
48, 44.1, 32
320, 256, 224,
longer disc loading times.
Layer 3
192, 160, 128,
112, 96, 80, 64,
Supported MP3 File Formats
56, 48, 40, 32
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 exten24, 22.05, 16
160, 128, 144,
MPEG-2 Audio
sion as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
Layer 3
112, 96, 80, 64,
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
56, 48, 40, 32,
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
24, 16, 8
not play the file.
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
supported by the radios.
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
4
280 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Playback of MP3 Files
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
by the following:
playable files).
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
to load than non-multisession discs
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 281
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
time⬙ priority mode.
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
down.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which ignition is OFF).
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s Uconnect姞 (Satellite Radio) — If Equipped
audio system to amplify the source and play through the Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcastvehicle speakers.
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxilRadio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
iary device if the AUX jack is connected.
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
4
282 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
System Activation
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated, and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account. For further
information, call the toll-free number 888-539-7474, or
visit the Sirius web site at www.sirius.com, or at
www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
ESN/SID Access
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
Selecting Uconnect威 (Satellite) Mode
Please have the following information available when Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display.
calling:
A CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 283
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as
bikes should be placed as far rearward as possible, within
the loading design of the rack. Do not place items directly
on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 (Satellite)
Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN or
ACC position to operate the radio.
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the SEEK Buttons
following reasons:
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
structure or under a physical obstacle.
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
form of short audio mutes.
without stopping until you release it.
4
284 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before con- to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
tinuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
MUSIC TYPE Button
button a second time.
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
INFO Button
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display informa- or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
tion between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if avail- seconds will allow the program format type to be seable). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an lected.
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
Song Title all of the time (press and hold again to return
type.
to normal display).
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
RW/FF
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons channel with the same selected Music Type name.
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
direction of the arrows.
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 285
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2 memory
can be selected by pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
Operating Instructions - Uconnect威 Phone
(If Equipped)
Refer to “Uconnect威 Phone” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
4
286 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
iPod姞/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
Connecting The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
This feature allows an iPod威 or external USB device to be Use the connection cable to connect an iPod威 or external
plugged into the USB port, located in the center console USB device to the vehicle’s USB/AUX connector port
or glove compartment.
which is located in the center console or glove compartment.
iPod威 control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod威
and iPhone威 devices. Some iPod威 software versions may
not fully support the iPod威 control features. Please visit
Apple’s website for software updates.
NOTE:
• If the radio has a USB port, refer to the appropriate
Uconnect威 Multimedia radio User’s Manual for iPod威
or external USB device support capability.
• Connecting an iPod威 or consumer electronic audio
device to the AUX port located in the radio faceplate,
plays media, but does not use the iPod威 /MP3 control
feature to control the connected device.
USB/AUX Connector Port
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 287
Once the audio device is connected and synchronized to • The audio device can be controlled using the radio
buttons to Play, Browse, and List the iPod威 contents.
the vehicle’s iPod威/USB/MP3 control system (iPod威 or
external USB device may take a few minutes to connect),
• The audio device battery charges when plugged into
the audio device starts charging and is ready for use by
the USB/AUX connector (if supported by the specific
pressing radio switches, as described below.
audio device)
NOTE: If the audio device battery is completely disControlling The iPod姞 Or External USB Device
charged, it may not communicate with the iPod威/USB/
Using Radio Buttons
MP3 control system until a minimum charge is attained.
Leaving the audio device connected to the iPod威/USB/ To get into the iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode and access
MP3 control system may charge it to the required level. a connected audio device, either press the “AUX” button
on the radio faceplate or press the VR button and say
Using This Feature
⬙USB⬙ or ⬙Switch to USB⬙. Once in the iPod威/USB/MP3
By using iPod cable or external USB device to connect to control mode, audio tracks (if available from audio
USB port:
device) start playing over the vehicle’s audio system.
• The audio device can be played on the vehicle’s sound Play Mode
system, providing metadata (artist, track title, album, When switched to iPod威/USB/MP3 control mode, the
etc.) information on the radio display.
iPod威 or external USB device automatically starts Play
4
288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
mode. In Play mode, the following buttons on the radio • A single press backward << RW or forward FF>> will
faceplate may be used to control the iPod威 or external
jump backward or forward respectively, for five seconds.
USB device and display data:
• Use the TUNE control knob to select the next or • Use the << SEEK and SEEK>> buttons to jump to the
previous track.
previous or next track. Pressing the SEEK>> button
during play mode will jump to the next track in the
• Turning it clockwise (forward) by one click, while
list, or press the VR button and say ⬙Next or Previous
playing a track, skips to the next track or press the
Track⬙.
VR button and say ⬙Next Track⬙.
• Turning it counterclockwise (backward) by one click, • While a track is playing, press the INFO button to see
will jump to the previous track in the list or press the
the associated metadata (artist, track title, album, etc.)
VR button and say ⬙Previous Track⬙
for that track. Pressing the INFO button again jumps
to the next screen of data for that track. Once all
• Jump backward in the current track by pressing and
screens have been viewed, the last INFO button press
holding the << RW button. Holding the << RW
button long enough will jump to the beginning of the
will go back to the play mode screen on the radio.
current track.
• Pressing the REPEAT button will change the audio
device mode to repeat the current playing track or
• Jump forward in the current track by pressing and
holding the FF>> button.
press the VR button and say ⬙Repeat ON⬙ or ⬙Repeat
Off⬙.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289
• Press the SCAN button to use iPod威/USB/MP3 device scan mode, which will play the first 10 seconds of
each track in the current list and then forward to the
next song. To stop SCAN mode and start playing the
desired track, when it is playing the track, press the
SCAN button again. During Scan mode, pressing the
<< SEEK and SEEK>> buttons will select the previous
and next tracks.
• RND button (available on sales code RES radio only):
Pressing this button toggles between Shuffle ON and
Shuffle OFF modes for the iPod威 or external USB
device, or press the VR button and say ⬙Shuffle ON⬙ or
⬙Shuffle Off⬙. If the RND icon is showing on the radio
display, then the shuffle mode is ON.
List Or Browse Mode
During Play mode, pressing any of the buttons described
below, will bring up List mode. List mode enables
scrolling through the list of menus and tracks on the
audio device.
• TUNE control knob: The TUNE control knob functions
in a similar manner as the scroll wheel on the audio
device or external USB device.
• Turning it clockwise (forward) and counterclockwise
(backward) scrolls through the lists, displaying the
track detail on the radio display. Once the track to be
played is highlighted on the radio display, press the
TUNE control knob to select and start playing the
track. Turning the TUNE control knob fast will scroll
through the list faster. During fast scroll, a slight
delay in updating the information on the radio
display may be noticeable.
4
290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• During all List modes, the iPod威 displays all lists in
• To exit List mode without selecting a track, press the
“wrap-around” mode. So if the track is at the bottom
same PRESET button again to go back to Play mode.
of the list, just turn the wheel backward (counter• LIST button: The LIST button will display the top
clockwise) to get to the track faster.
level menu of the iPod威 or external USB device. Turn
• In List mode, the radio PRESET buttons are used as
the TUNE control knob to list the top-menu item to be
shortcuts to the following lists on the iPod威 or
selected and press the TUNE control knob. This will
external USB device.
display the next sub-menu list item on the audio
• Preset 1 – Playlists
device, then follow the same steps to go to the desired
• Preset 2 – Artists
track in that list. Not all iPod威 or external USB device
sub-menu levels are available on this system.
• Preset 3 – Albums
• Preset 4 – Genres
• MUSIC TYPE button: The MUSIC TYPE button is
• Preset 5 – Audiobooks
another shortcut button to the genre listing on your
audio device.
• Preset 6 – Podcasts
• Pressing a PRESET button will display the current
list on the top line and the first item in that list on the
second line.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291
CAUTION!
• Leaving the iPod威 or external USB device (or any
supported device) anywhere in the vehicle in extreme heat or cold can alter the operation or damage the device. Follow the device manufacturer’s
guidelines.
• Placing items on the iPod威 or external USB device,
or connections to the iPod威 or external USB device
in the vehicle, can cause damage to the device
and/or to the connectors.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod威 or external USB
device while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in an accident.
Bluetooth Streaming Audio (BTSA)
Music can be streamed from your cellular phone to the
Uconnect威 phone system.
Controlling BTSA Using Radio Buttons
To get into the BTSA mode, press either “AUX” button on
the radio or press the VR button and say “Bluetooth
Streaming Audio”.
Play Mode
When switched to BTSA mode, some audio devices can
start playing music over the vehicle’s audio system, but
some devices require the music to be initiated on the
device first, then it will get streamed to the Uconnect威
phone system. Seven devices can be paired to the
Uconnect威 phone system, but just one can be selected
and played.
4
292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Selecting Different Audio Device
Previous Track
Use the SEEK DOWN button, or press the VR button on
the radio and say “Previous Track” to jump to the
2. After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
previous track music on your cellular phone.
⬙Setup⬙, then ⬙Select Audio Devices⬙.
Browse
3. Say the name of the audio device or ask the Uconnect威
Browsing is not available on a BTSA device. Only the
phone system to list audio devices.
current song that is playing will display info.
Next Track
1. Press PHONE button to begin.
Use the SEEK UP button, or press the VR button on the
radio and say “Next Track” to jump to the next track
music on your cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear pushbutton in the center and controls the volume and
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to mode of the sound system. Pressing the top of the rocker
switch will increase the volume, and pressing the bottom
access the switches.
of the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
Pressing the center button will make the radio switch
between the various modes available (AM/FM/SAT/
CD/HDD/AUX/VES, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View Of Steering
Wheel)
Pressing the top of the switch will “Seek” up for the next
listenable station and pressing the bottom of the switch
will “Seek” down for the next listenable station.
4
294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the left-hand control CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
will tune to the next preset station that you have pro- To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
grammed in the radio preset pushbutton.
precautions:
CD Player
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
Pressing the top of the switch once will go to the next
surface.
track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
will go to the beginning of the current track, or to the
wiping from center to edge.
beginning of the previous track if it is within one second
after the current track begins to play.
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
If you press the switch up or down twice, it plays the
second track; three times, it will play the third, etc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or anti-static sprays.
The center button on the left side rocker switch has no
function for a single-disc CD player. However, when a 5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
multiple-disc CD player is equipped on the vehicle, the
center button will select the next available CD in the
player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295
not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does
not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
too high.
turned down or off during mobile phone operation when
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particu- not using Uconnect威 (if equipped).
lar disc, it may be damaged (i.e., scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc) CLIMATE CONTROLS
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known The air conditioning and heating system is designed to
good disc before considering disc player service.
make you comfortable in all types of weather.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the mobile phone antenna. This condition is
4
296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
Blower Control
Rotate this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the ventilation system in any mode. The
blower speed increases as you move
the control to the right from the “O”
(OFF) position. There are seven blower
speeds.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the blower control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
Manual Temperature Control
The Manual Temperature Controls consist of a series of
outer rotary dials and inner push knobs.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297
Temperature Control
Rotate this control to regulate the temperature of the air inside the passenger
compartment. Rotating the dial left
into the blue area of the scale indicates
cooler temperatures, while rotating
right into the red area indicates
warmer temperatures.
Mode Control (Air Direction)
Rotate this control to choose from several patterns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary mode as
identified by the symbols on the control, or a blend of two of these modes.
The closer the setting is to a particular
symbol, the more air distribution you
receive from that mode.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C con- Panel
denser located in front of the radiator for an accumulaAir is directed through the outlets in the instrution of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
from behind the radiator and through the condenser. airflow.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers
for maximum airflow to the rear.
4
298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Bi-Level
Defrost
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
mum blower and temperature settings for best windthere is a difference in temperature between the upper
shield and side window defrosting.
and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during NOTE:
sunny but cool conditions.
• The air conditioning compressor operates in Mix,
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
small amount flowing through the defrost and
side window demist outlets.
Defrost, or a blend of these modes, even if the Air
Conditioning (A/C) button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve
fuel economy, use these modes only when necessary.
• For information on operating the Rear Defrost, refer
to “Rear Window Features” in “Understanding The
Features Of Your Vehicle”.
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Mix
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299
• The A/C will engage automatically to prevent fogging
when the recirculation button is pressed and the mode
Pressing the Recirculation Control button will
control is set to panel or panel / floor.
put the system in recirculation mode. This can
be used when outside conditions such as • The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in the • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
control button to illuminate.
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
Recirculation Control
NOTE:
• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make Air Conditioning Control
the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.
Press this button to engage the Air ConExtended use of this mode is not recommended.
ditioning. A light will illuminate when
the Air Conditioning system is engaged.
• The use of the Recirculation mode in cold or damp
Rotating the dial left into the blue area
weather will cause windows to fog on the inside,
of the scale indicates cooler temperabecause of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. Select
tures, while rotating right into the red
the outside air position for maximum defogging.
area indicates warmer temperatures.
4
300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds. Equipped
• MAX A/C
The Automatic Temperature Control system automatically maintains the climate in the cabin of the vehicle at
For maximum cooling use the A/C and recirculation
the comfort levels desired by the driver and passenger.
buttons at the same time.
• ECONOMY MODE
If economy mode is desired, press the A/C button to turn
OFF the indicator light and the A/C compressor. Then,
move the temperature control to the desired temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301
You will experience the greatest efficiency by simply
allowing the system to function automatically. Selecting
Operation of the system is quite simple.
the “O” (OFF) position on the blower control stops the
1. Turn the Mode Control knob (on the right) and the system completely and closes the outside air intake.
Blower Control knob (on the left) to AUTO.
The recommended setting for maximum comfort for the
NOTE: The AUTO position performs best for front seat average person is 72°F (22°C); however, this may vary.
occupants only.
NOTE:
Dial in the temperature you would
• The temperature setting can be adjusted at anytime
like the system to maintain by rotating
without affecting automatic operation.
the Temperature Control knob. Once
the comfort level is selected, the sys- • Pressing the Air Conditioning Control button while in
tem will maintain that level automatiAUTO mode will cause the LED in the control button
cally using the heating system. Should
to flash three times and then turn off. This indicates
the desired comfort level require air
that the system is in AUTO mode and requesting the
conditioning, the system will automatically make the
air conditioning is not necessary.
adjustment.
Automatic Operation
4
302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than
expected, check the front of the A/C condenser located
in front of the radiator for an accumulation of dirt or
insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from behind
the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric front
fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the condenser,
reducing air conditioning performance.
Blower Control
Manual Operation
This system offers a full complement of manual override
features, which consist of Blower Preferred Automatic,
Mode Preferred Automatic, or Blower and Mode Preferred Automatic. This means the operator can override
the blower, the mode, or both. There is a manual blower
range for times when the AUTO setting is not desired.
The blower can be set to any fixed blower speed by
rotating the Blower Control knob (on the left).
For full automatic operation or for
automatic blower operation, turn the NOTE: Please read the Automatic Temperature Control
knob to the AUTO position. In manual Operation Chart that follows for details.
mode there are seven blower speeds
that can be individual selected. In off
position the blower will shut off.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303
4
304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The operator can override the AUTO mode setting to • Floor
change airflow distribution by rotating the Mode Control
Air is directed through the floor outlets with a
knob (on the right) to one of the following positions.
small amount flowing through the defrost and
• Panel
side window demist outlets.
Air is directed through the outlets in the instru- • Mix
ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side
airflow.
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
NOTE: The center instrument panel outlets can be aimed cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat to the
so that they are directed toward the rear seat passengers windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort
for maximum airflow to the rear.
while reducing moisture on the windshield.
• Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
• Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxiNOTE: For all settings, except full cold or full hot,
mum blower and temperature settings for best windthere is a difference in temperature between the upper
shield and side window defrosting.
and lower outlets. The warmer air flows to the floor
outlets. This feature gives improved comfort during
sunny but cool conditions.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305
• Air Conditioner Control
NOTE:
Press this button to turn on the air • When the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position, the recirculation feature will be cancelled.
conditioning during manual operation
only. When the air conditioning is
• In cold weather, use of the Recirculation mode may
turned on, cool dehumidified air will
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation
flow through the outlets selected with
mode is not allowed in the defrost mode in order to
the Mode control dial. Press this butimprove window clearing. Recirculation will be diston a second time to turn OFF the air
abled automatically if these modes are selected.
conditioning. An LED in the button illuminates when
• Extended use of recirculation may cause the windows
manual compressor operation is selected.
to fog. If the interior of the windows begins to fog,
• Recirculation Control
press the Recirculation button to return to outside air.
The system will automatically control recircuSome temp/humidity conditions will cause captured
lation. However, pressing the Recirculation
interior air to condense on windows and hamper
Control button will put the system in recircuvisibility. For this reason, the system will not allow
lation mode. This can be used when outside
Recirculation to be selected while in defrost mode.
conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity
Attempting to use the recirculation while in these
are present. Activating recirculation will cause the LED in
modes will cause the LED in the control button to blink
the control button to illuminate.
and then turn off.
4
306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Most of the time, when in Automatic Operation, you
can temporarily put the system into Recirculation
Mode by pressing the Recirculation button. However,
under certain conditions, while in Automatic Mode,
the system is blowing air out the defrost vents. When
these conditions are present, and the Recirculation
button is pressed, the indicator will flash and then turn
off. This tells you that you are unable to go into
Recirculation Mode at this time. If you would like the
system to go into Recirculation Mode, you must first
move the Mode knob to Panel, Bi-Level, Mix, or Floor
and then press the Recirculation button. This feature
reduces the possibility of window fogging.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system in air-conditioned vehicles
must be protected with a high-quality antifreeze coolant
to provide proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. A solution of 50% ethylene
glycol antifreeze coolant and 50% water is recommended.
Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your
Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.
Winter Operation
Use of the air Recirculation Mode during winter months
is not recommended because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation Storage
Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of service
NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air
suggested control settings for various weather condi- conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in the
tions.
fresh air and high blower settings. This will ensure
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307
adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
of compressor damage when the system is started again. the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
Window Fogging
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re- Outside Air Intake
moved by turning the mode selector to Defrost. The
Defrost/Floor mode can be used to maintain a clear
windshield and provide sufficient heating. If side window fogging becomes a problem, increase blower speed.
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in mild but
rainy or humid weather.
Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the
windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves
collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
winter months, make sure the air intake is clear of ice,
slush, and snow.
NOTE: Recirculate without A/C should not be used for A/C Air Filter — If Equipped
long periods as fogging may occur.
The A/C Filter prevents most dust and pollen from entering
the cabin. The filter acts on air coming from outside the
Side Window Demisters
vehicle and recirculated air within the passenger compartA side window demister outlet is located at each end of
ment. Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining
the instrument panel. These non-adjustable outlets direct
Your Vehicle” for A/C Air Filter service information or see
air toward the side windows when the system is in the
your authorized dealer for service. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedules” for filter service intervals.
4
308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Control Setting Suggestions for Various Weather Conditions
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .313
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .314 䡵 AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . .
▫ Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C) . .315
▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
▫ Continuously Variable Automatic
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .316
䡵 AUTOSTICK威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
䡵 MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED . . .316
▫ Continuously Variable Automatic
▫ Five–Speed Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . .316
Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . .319
. . .320
. . .320
. . .321
. . .327
. . .327
5
310 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
䡵 OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
▫ When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The
4WD Lock Lever Engaged . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .331
▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333
▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337
䡵 POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .344
䡵 ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .346
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .346
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .348
▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped . . .349
▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) –
Manual Transmission Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . .350
▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .352
▫ ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . .355
䡵 PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340 䡵 TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
䡵 BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
STARTING AND OPERATING 311
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .360
▫ Full Size Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .362
▫ Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .374
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .363
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
䡵 TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION. . . . . . . . .368
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .371 䡵 TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .378
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
䡵 TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .379
▫ All Season Tires – If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .371 䡵 TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
▫ Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped . . .372
▫ Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .382
▫ Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
▫ Premium System – If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . .385
▫ Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped . . . . . . . . .373
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
5
312 STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389 䡵 VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ 2.0L And 2.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390 䡵 TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .391
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Trailer Towing Weights
(Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . .402
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .393
䡵 ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .396
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
䡵 RECREATIONAL TOWING
(BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . .411
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . . .411
STARTING AND OPERATING 313
STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING! (Continued)
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the key fob from the ignition. When leaving
the vehicle, always lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
(Continued)
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is locked,
rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve pressure on
the locking mechanism and then turn the key.
5
314 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Normal Starting
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes not require pumping or pressing the accelerator pedal.
before shifting to any driving gear.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
out of PARK.
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
Tip Start
“Normal Starting” procedure.
Do not press the accelerator. Turn the ignition switch to
the START position and release it as soon as the starter
engages. The starter motor will continue to run, and it
will disengage automatically when the engine is running.
If the engine fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically in 10 seconds. If this occurs, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel
could enter the catalytic converter and once the
engine has started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle. If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a start from
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 315
WARNING! (Continued)
another vehicle. This type of start can be dangerous if
done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully.
Refer to “Jump Starting” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –20°F Or −29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
in the ON position, release the accelerator pedal and
repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
5
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” and “Extreme Cold Weather” procedures, it may be flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all
After Starting
the way to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear any excess The idle speed is controlled automatically and it will
fuel in case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key decrease as the engine warms up.
316 STARTING AND OPERATING
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits Five–Speed Manual Transmission
quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a
standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a
WARNING!
grounded, three-wire extension cord.
You or others could be injured if you leave the vehicle
The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one unattended without having the parking brake fully
hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine. applied. The parking brake should always be applied
when the driver is not in the vehicle, especially on an
WARNING!
incline.
Remember to disconnect the engine block heater
cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt
electrical cord could cause electrocution.
Fully press the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As you
release the clutch pedal, lightly press the accelerator
pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING 317
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, fifth gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Shift Pattern
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transmission is in first gear, (not third), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in third gear.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transmission lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transmission.
5
318 STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Shift Speeds
Downshifting
To use your manual transmission for optimal fuel Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
economy, it should be upshifted as listed in the following prolong engine life.
table.
Manual Transmission Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
Engine
Accel1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5
Size
eration
Rate
All
Accel
14
23
29
45
Engines
(23)
(37)
(47)
(72)
Cruise
12
18
25
32
(19)
(29)
(40)
(52)
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to second or first gear when descending a steep
grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overburdened.
STARTING AND OPERATING 319
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the following precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle
has come to a complete stop and the engine is at
idle speed.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle
speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running.
• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking
brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and remove the ignition key. Once the key is removed,
the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the
vehicle against unwanted movement When leaving
the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and
lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
(Continued)
5
320 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the ignition key in or near the vehicle,
or in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
Key Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Interlock which requires the shift lever to be placed in PARK
before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/
OFF position. The key fob can only be removed from the
ignition when the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF position,
and the shift lever is locked in PARK whenever the
ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF position.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key fob cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the shift lever in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To move the shift lever out
STARTING AND OPERATING 321
of PARK, the ignition switch must be turned to the Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the
ON/RUN position (engine running or not) and the brake accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.
Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when
pedal must be pressed.
shifting the transmission between these gears.
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
The transmission shift lever has PARK, REVERSE, NEU(CVT)
TRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual shifts can be
The shift lever position display (located in the instrument
made using the AutoStick威 shift control (refer to
cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. You must
“AutoStick威” in this section). Moving the shift lever to
press the brake pedal to move the shift lever out of PARK
the left or right (-/+) while in the DRIVE position will
(refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System” in
manually select from a set of predefined transmission
this section). To drive, move the shift lever from PARK or
gear ratios, and will display the current gear in the
NEUTRAL to the DRIVE position.
instrument cluster as 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1.
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission (CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This
may sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal
and does not harm anything.
5
322 STARTING AND OPERATING
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL into another gear range.
NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to
allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.
This is especially important when the engine is cold.
Shift Lever
PARK
This range supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in
motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the
vehicle in this range.
STARTING AND OPERATING 323
When parking on a level surface, you may place the shift
lever in PARK first, and then apply the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before
placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load on the
transmission locking mechanism may make it difficult to
move the shift lever out of PARK. As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking brake
fully when parked to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others
if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to
move the shift lever out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in
PARK before leaving the vehicle.
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL
if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and your foot is
firmly pressing the brake pedal.
(Continued)
5
324 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission into PARK,
and remove the ignition key. Once the key is
removed, the shift lever is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted movement.
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the ignition key and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 325
CAUTION!
• Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you
must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF
position to the ON/RUN position, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the shift
lever could result.
• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this
can damage the drivetrain.
• With brake pedal released, verify that the shift lever
will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE
This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into
REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
NEUTRAL
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged
periods with the engine running. The engine may be
The following indicators should be used to ensure that started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position: the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK, firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward and to the left until it stops and is
fully seated.
• Look at the shift lever position display and verify that
it indicates the PARK position.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the
ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe
(Continued)
5
326 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
DRIVE
practices that limit your response to changing traffic
or road conditions. You might lose control of the
vehicle and have a collision.
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides the best fuel economy. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteristics under
all normal operating conditions.
CAUTION!
When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as
when operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or
while towing heavy trailers), use the AutoStick威 shift
control (if equipped) to select a lower gear ratio. Under
these conditions, using a lower gear ratio will improve
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
excessive shifting and heat buildup.
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other
reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause
severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational
Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A
Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”
for further information.
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transmission oil
may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission
overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the transmission cools down enough
STARTING AND OPERATING 327
to allow a return to the requested speed. This is done to
prevent transmission damage due to overheating. If the
high speed is maintained, the overheating may reoccur,
as before, in a cyclic fashion.
LOW – IF EQUIPPED
and downshifts, and improve overall vehicle performance. This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and many other
situations.
Operation
This range should be used for engine braking when
descending very steep grades. In this range, the trans- NOTE: AutoStick威 is not available until the CVT warms
mission will downshift for maximum engine braking, up in cold weather.
and upshifts will occur only to prevent engine overspeed.
When the shift lever is in the DRIVE position, AutoStick威
is activated by moving the shift lever side-to-side. MovAUTOSTICK姞
ing the shift lever to the right (+) will activate AutoStick威
Continuously Variable Automatic Transmission
and shift up to the next higher manual ratio, unless you
(CVT)
are already operating in or near Overdrive, in which case
AutoStick威 is a driver-interactive transmission feature sixth gear ratio will be selected. In like manner, moving
providing six manually selectable gear ratios, giving you the shift lever to the left (-) will activate AutoStick威 and
more control of the vehicle. AutoStick威 allows you to shift to the next lower manual ratio. The manuallymaximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts selected gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
5
328 STARTING AND OPERATING
In AutoStick威 mode, the transmission will shift up or • If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
down when the driver moves the shift lever to the right
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
(+) or left (-), unless an engine lugging or overspeed
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
condition would result. It will remain in the selected gear
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable
until another upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
AutoStick威 mode and the transmission will return to
described below:
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
• The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop. After a stop, the driver • To disengage AutoStick威 mode, hold the shift lever to
the right (+) until “D” is once again displayed in the
should manually upshift (+) the transmission as the
instrument cluster. You can shift in or out of the
vehicle is accelerated.
AutoStick威 mode at any time without taking your foot
• The transmission will automatically upshift when necoff the accelerator pedal.
essary to prevent engine over-speed.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
• Transmission shifting will be more noticeable when
AutoStick威 is engaged.
• Heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application will
disengage AutoStick威 mode.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a
slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their
grip and the vehicle could skid, causing an accident
or personal injury.
STARTING AND OPERATING 329
traction surfaces, activate the “4WD LOCK” switch by
pulling up once and releasing. This locks the center
coupling allowing more torque to be sent to the rear
This feature provides full time, on-demand, four–wheel
wheels. The “4WD Indicator Light” will come on in the
drive (4WD).
cluster. This can be done on the fly, at any vehicle speed.
To deactivate, simply pull on the switch one more time.
The “4WD Indicator Light” will then go out.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System/
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in “Starting and Operating” for further information.
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Four-Wheel Drive Switch
Where one or more wheels have wheel spin or if additional traction is needed in sand, deep snow, or loose
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance and a
narrower track to make them capable of performing in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Specific design
characteristics give them a higher center of gravity than
ordinary cars.
5
330 STARTING AND OPERATING
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better
view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems.
They are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as
conventional two-wheel drive vehicles any more than
low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp
turns or abrupt maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this
type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in
loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
You will encounter many types of terrain driving offroad. You should be familiar with the terrain and area
before proceeding. There are many types of surface
conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,
mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on
your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road
driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel
and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden
accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no
road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore
you will need to use your own good judgment on what is
safe and what is not. When on a trail, you should always
be looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while
remembering what you are currently driving over.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle
exhaust system could cause a fire.
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an
off-road situation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 331
When To Use Low (L Off-Road) With The 4WD
Lock Lever Engaged
When driving off-road, shift into low (L Off-Road) and
activate the 4WD LOCK. This will provide additional
traction and activates the numerous off-road features to
improve handling and control on slippery or difficult
terrain. Due to the sustained lower gearing, low (L OffRoad) with 4WD LOCK engaged will allow the engine to
operate in a higher power range. This will allow you to
cross over obstacles and descend hills, with improved
control and less effort.
NOTE: For maximum off-road performance, premium
fuel is recommended. While the vehicle will operate on
regular fuel when in L Off-Road mode, the engine has
been calibrated for maximum performance using premium fuel.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in
snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to
steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore, you
should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances
and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a
slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the
vehicle’s momentum.
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and traction at
slower speeds, activate the 4WD LOCK and shift the
transaxle to low (L Off-Road) if necessary. Do not shift to a
lower gear than necessary to maintain headway. Overrevving the engine can spin the wheels and traction will be
lost. If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering
wheel no more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth,
while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to get
a fresh ⬙bite⬙ and help maintain your momentum.
5
332 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high
engine RPM’s or vehicle speeds because engine braking may cause skidding and loss of control.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction around the tires
and is very difficult to get through. You should use low
(L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and maintain
your momentum. If you start to slow to a stop, try
turning your steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth for additional traction. Mud holes
pose an increased threat of vehicle damage and getting
stuck. They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before entering
any mud hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if
there are any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be
safely recovered if stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with full tire
pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a trail
maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not stop. The
key to driving in soft sand is using the appropriate tire
pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s momentum. If you are
going to be driving on large soft sandy areas or dunes,
reduce your tire pressure to a minimum of 15 psi
(103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire surface area. You
should use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and ESC turned off. Reduced tire pressure will
drastically improve your traction and handling, while
driving on the soft sand, but you must return the tires to
normal air pressure before driving on pavement or other
hard surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate the
tires prior to reducing the pressure.
STARTING AND OPERATING 333
CAUTION!
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill consider its grade or steepness.
Determine if it is too steep. Look to see what the traction
is on the hill side trail. Is the trail straight up and down?
What is on top and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can you safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and you feel confident, then you should
Hill Climbing
use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged and
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under- proceed with caution maintaining your momentum as
standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations. you climb the hill.
Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep
to climb and should not be attempted. You should always Driving Up Hill
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You Once you have determined your ability to proceed and
should always climb hills straight up and down. Never have shifted into the appropriate gear, line your vehicle
attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
up for the straightest possible run. Accelerate with an
easy constant throttle and apply more power as you start
up the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade; the
abrupt change of grade could cause you to lose control.
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and
total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire
unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce
your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
5
334 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the front end begins to bounce, ease off the throttle
slightly to bring all four tires back on the ground. As you
approach the crest of the hill, ease off the throttle and
slowly proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip as
you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator
and maintain headway by turning the steering wheel no
more than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth. This will
provide a fresh ⬙bite⬙ into the surface and will usually
provide enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and
back straight down the grade using engine resistance
along with the vehicle brakes.
Driving Down Hill
Before driving down a steep hill you need to determine if
it is too steep for a safe descent. What is the surface
traction? Is the grade too steep to maintain a slow
controlled descent? Are there obstacles? Is it a straight
descent? Is there plenty of distance at the base of the hill
to regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If you feel
confident in your ability to proceed then make sure you
are in low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK engaged
and proceed with caution. Allow engine and hill descent
braking to control the descent and apply your brakes if
necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn
around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline
increases the risk of a rollover, which may result in
severe injury.
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use
vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.
Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose
control and be seriously injured.
STARTING AND OPERATING 335
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible avoid driving across an incline. If it is
necessary, know your vehicle’s abilities. Driving across
an incline places more weight on the down-hill wheels,
which increases the possibilities of a down-hill slide or
rollover. Make sure the surface has good traction with
firm and stable soils. If possible transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of a
rollover , which may result in severe injury.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
and hill descent braking to control the descent and apply
your brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot
make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never
attempt to turn around. To do so may result in
tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in
severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a
hill in REVERSE gear. Never back down a hill in
NEUTRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never
drive diagonally across a hill, always drive straight
up or down.
Driving Through Water
If you stall or begin to lose headway while climbing a
steep hill, allow your vehicle to come to a stop and Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.
immediately apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift Water crossings should be avoided if possible, and only
to REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
5
336 STARTING AND OPERATING
be attempted when necessary in a safe responsible manner. You should only drive through areas which are
designated and approved. You should tread lightly and
avoid damage to the environment. You should know
your vehicles abilities and be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should never stop or shut a
vehicle off when crossing deep water unless you ingested
water into the engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do
not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow. You
want to use low (L Off-Road) with the 4WD LOCK
engaged and proceed very slowly with a constant slow
speed {3-5 mph (5–8 km/h) maximum} and light throttle.
Keep the vehicle moving; do not try to accelerate through
the crossing. After crossing any water higher than the
bottom of the axle differentials, you should inspect all of
the vehicle fluids for signs of water ingestion.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the transaxle, transfer case,
engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive too
fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or other
vehicle components and your brakes will be less
effective once wet and/or muddy.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to determine if you can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the water or probe it with
a stick. You need to be sure of its depth, approach angle,
current and bottom condition. Be careful of murky or
muddy waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you can
recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to a safe crossing
is the water depth, current and bottom conditions. On
STARTING AND OPERATING 337
soft bottoms, the vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this
when determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other
Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water areas
normally contain murky or muddy waters. These water
types normally contain hidden obstacles and make it
difficult to determine an accurate water depth, approach
angle, and bottom condition. Murky or muddy water
holes are where you want to hook up tow straps prior to
entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and easier
vehicle recovery. If you are able to determine you can
safely cross, than proceed using the low and slow
method.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effectiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than
does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is
always a good idea to check for damage. That way you
can get any problems taken care of right away and have
your vehicle ready when you need it.
• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.
Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and
exhaust system for damage.
• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as
required.
5
338 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on
the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and suspension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the
values specified in the Service Manual.
WARNING! (Continued)
not have full braking power when you need it to
prevent a collision. If you have been operating your
vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked
and cleaned as necessary.
• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These
things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage
to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and • If you experience unusual vibration after driving in
propeller shafts.
mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for
impacted material. Impacted material can cause a
• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or
wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will
similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake
correct the situation.
rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected
and cleaned as soon as possible.
POWER STEERING
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause
excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might
(Continued)
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
STARTING AND OPERATING 339
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
NOTE:
• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel
travel are considered normal and do not indicate that
there is a problem with the power steering system.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering pump may make noise for a short amount of time.
This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering
system. This noise should be considered normal, and it Power Steering Fluid Check
does not in any way damage the steering system.
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
5
340 STARTING AND OPERATING
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici- If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho- level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
rized dealer.
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts”
in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering
system as the chemicals can damage your power
steering components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
PARKING BRAKE
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave an
automatic transmission in PARK, or manual transmission
in REVERSE or first gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center console.
To apply the parking brake, pull the lever up as firmly as
possible. To release the parking brake, pull the lever up
slightly, press the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
STARTING AND OPERATING 341
NOTE:
• When the parking brake is applied and the automatic
transmission is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning
Light” will flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime
will sound to alert the driver. Fully release the parking
brake before attempting to move the vehicle.
• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied.
It does not show the degree of brake application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front
wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away
from the curb on an uphill grade. For vehicles equipped
Parking Brake
with an automatic transmission, apply the parking brake
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition
before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise the load
switch in the ON position, the “Brake Warning Light” in
on the transmission locking mechanism may make it
the instrument cluster will illuminate.
difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK. The parking
brake should always be applied whenever the driver is
not in the vehicle.
5
342 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is
dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or
others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the shift lever.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle, or
in a location accessible to children. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and a collision.
• Always fully apply the parking brake when leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or
injury. Also, be certain to leave an automatic transmission in PARK, a manual transmission in REVERSE or first gear. Failure to do so may cause the
vehicle to roll and cause damage or injury.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system malfunction is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by
an authorized dealer immediately.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 343
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the “Brake Warning
Light” will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning Light” on
is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or vehicle stability during braking may
occur. It will take you longer to stop the vehicle or
will make your vehicle harder to control. You could
have a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
5
344 STARTING AND OPERATING
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
WARNING! (Continued)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the anti-lock brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded
by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or
the traction afforded.
(Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, following
another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
The “ABS Warning Light” monitors the ABS
System. The light will come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position
and may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the “ABS Warning Light” remains on or comes on
while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and that service is
STARTING AND OPERATING 345
required. However, the conventional brake system will This self-check occurs each time the vehicle is started and
continue to operate normally if the “Brake Warning accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
Light” is not on.
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
If the “ABS Warning Light” is on, the brake system stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can inshould be serviced as soon as possible to restore the clude ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “ABS Warning Light” debris, or panic stops.
does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to You may also experience the following when the brake
the ON position, have the bulb repaired as soon as system goes into anti-lock mode:
possible.
• the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
If both the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS Warning
short time after the stop)
Light” remain on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD) systems are not functioning. Immedi- • the clicking sound of solenoid valves
ate repair to the ABS is required.
• brake pedal pulsations
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you may • a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some related
of the stop
motor noises. These noises are the system performing its
self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS working properly. These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
5
346 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
(TCS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM), Hill Descent Control (HDC), Hill Start Assist
(HSA), and Electronic Stability Control (ESC). All systems work together to enhance vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions and are commonly
referred to as ESC.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
accurate signals for the computer.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting and
Operating” for further information.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Traction Control System (TCS)
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Traction Control System the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
STARTING AND OPERATING 347
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESC are in
either the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes. Refer to
“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this section of this
manual.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
(Continued)
5
348 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the
speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate
of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicles speed
are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it applies the
brake of the appropriate wheel and may also reduce
engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM will only intervene during very severe or
evasive driving maneuvers.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring
during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It can not
prevent wheel lift due to other factors such as road
conditions, leaving the roadway or striking objects or
other vehicles.
NOTE: Anytime the ESC system is in the “Full Off”
mode, ERM is disabled. Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation
of the available ESC modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road conditions and driving conditions, influence the chance
that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot
prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects
or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERMequipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the
user’s safety or the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 349
Off” button for five seconds. Refer to “Electronic Stability
This system maintains vehicle speed while descending Control (ESC)” in this section of the manual.
hills during off-road driving situations. HDC will auto- HDC operation can be overridden with brake application
matically apply the brakes to control downhill speed to to slow the vehicle down below the HDC control speed.
between 4 mph (7 km/h) and 6 mph (9 km/h) depending Conversely, if more speed is desired during HDC control,
on terrain. The system is activated by placing the vehicle the accelerator pedal will increase vehicle speed like
in “Off-Road” mode and placing the shift lever in LOW normal. When either the brake or the accelerator is
or REVERSE. Refer to “Safe Off-Road Driving” in “Start- released, HDC will control the vehicle back to the origiing and Operating” for further information.
nal set speed.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) – If Equipped
When HDC is properly enabled, the “Hill HDC is only intended for low speed off-road driving. At
Decent Control Light” in the instrument cluster vehicle speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h) HDC will no
will be illuminated.
longer function. If the “HDC Indicator Light” begins to
flash this indicates that the brakes are getting too hot and
HDC has the capability to sense terrain and will only the vehicle should be stopped to allow the brakes to cool.
activate when the vehicle is descending a hill. It will not
activate on level ground. If desired, HDC can be fully
deactivated by putting the vehicle into ESC “Full Off”
mode. This is done by pressing and holding the “ESC
5
350 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in controlling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver
must remain attentive to the driving conditions and
is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
HSA Activation Criteria
The following criteria must be met in order for HSA to
activate:
• Vehicle must be stopped.
• Vehicle must be on a 7% grade or greater hill.
• Gear selection matches vehicle uphill direction (i.e.,
vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).
The HSA system is designed to assist the driver when
starting a vehicle from a stop on a hill. HSA will maintain
WARNING!
the level of brake pressure the driver applied for a short
period of time after the driver takes their foot off of the There may be situations on minor hills (i.e., less than
brake pedal. If the driver does not apply the throttle 8%), with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer,
during this short period of time, the system will release when the system will not activate and slight rolling
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the hill. The may occur. This could cause a collision with another
system will release brake pressure in proportion to vehicle or object. Always remember the driver is
amount of throttle applied as the vehicle starts to move in responsible for braking the vehicle.
the intended direction of travel.
Hill Start Assist (HSA) – Manual Transmission
Only
STARTING AND OPERATING 351
Disabling/Enabling HSA
5. Release the clutch pedal (if equipped).
If you wish to turn on or off the HSA system, it can be 6. Rotate the steering wheel one-half turn to the left.
done using the Customer Programmable Features in the
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC). Refer to 7. Press the “ESC Off” switch (located in the lower
switch bank below the climate controls) four times
“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in “Unwithin 20 seconds. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informaIndicator Light” should turn on and turn off two
tion.
times.
For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
8. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an
following steps:
additional half-turn to the right.
NOTE: You must complete Steps 1 through 8 within
9. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then
90 seconds.
back to the ON position. If the sequence was com1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing
pleted properly, the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
straight forward).
Indicator Light” will blink several times to confirm
HSA is disabled.
2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Start the engine.
10. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature
to it’s previous setting.
5
352 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC corrects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESC uses sensors in
the vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESC applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist
in counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition
• Over-steer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
• Under-steer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
WARNING!
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
• ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Only a safe, attentive, and
skillful driver can prevent collisions.
• The capabilities of an ESC-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner, which could jeopardize the user’s safety or
the safety of others.
STARTING AND OPERATING 353
ESC Operating Modes
The ESC system has three available operating modes for
four–wheel drive equipped vehicles and two available
operating modes for two–wheel drive equipped vehicles.
Full On (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On (Two-Wheel
Drive Models)
This is the normal operating mode for ESC. Whenever
the vehicle is started the ESC system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESC should only be turned to “Partial Off” or
“ESC Off” for specific reasons as noted below.
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will be illuminated. All other stability features of ESC function normally. This mode is intended to be used if the vehicle is
in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and more wheel
spin than ESC would normally allow is required to gain
traction.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
switch. This will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
Partial Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models) Or On
mode by pressing the “ESC Off” switch. Once the situa(Two-Wheel Drive Models)
tion requiring ESC to be switched to the “Partial Off”
mode is overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily
This mode is entered by momentarily pressing the “ESC
pressing the “ESC Off” switch. This may be done while
Off” switch. When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS portion
the vehicle is in motion.
of ESC, except for the “limited slip” feature described
in the TCS section, has been disabled and the “ESC
5
354 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of
ESC (except for the limited slip feature described in
the TCS section) has been disabled and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the engine power reduction of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered
by the ECS system is reduced.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
“ESC OFF” message will appear in the odometer. Press
and release the Trip Odometer button located on the
instrument cluster to clear this message.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the “limited slip”
feature described in the TCS section, are turned off until
the vehicle reaches a speed of 35 mph (56 km/h). At
35 mph (56 km/h) the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, as described above. TCS remains off. When the
vehicle speed drops below 30 mph (48 km/h) the ESC
system shuts off. ESC is deactivated at low vehicle speeds
so that it will not interfere with off-road driving however,
ESC function returns to provide the stability feature at
speeds above 35 mph (56 km/h). The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will always be illuminated
when ESC is off.
This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use
when ESC stability features could inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail conditions. This mode is entered by
pressing and holding the “ESC Off” switch for five
seconds when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the “ESC Activation/ To turn ESC on again, momentarily press the “ESC Off”
Malfunction Indicator Light” will illuminate and the switch. This will restore the “ESC On” mode of operation.
STARTING AND OPERATING 355
NOTE: The “ESC OFF” message will display and an ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light And
audible chime will sound when the shift lever is placed ESC OFF Indicator Light
into the PARK position from any other position, and then
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
moved out of the PARK position. This will occur even if
Light” in the instrument cluster will come on
the message was previously cleared.
when the ignition switch is turned to the ON
position. It should go out with the engine
WARNING!
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
With the ESC in the ⴖFull Offⴖ mode, the engine Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a
torque reduction and stability features are disabled. malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this
Therefore, the enhanced vehicle stability offered by light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the
ESP is unavailable. In an emergency evasive maneu- vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at
ver, the ESC system will not engage to assist in speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your authomaintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
for off-highway or off-road use only.
5
356 STARTING AND OPERATING
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo- • Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system
cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also
when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop
flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during acthat caused the ESC activation.
celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.
STARTING AND OPERATING 357
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
NOTE:
Tire Markings
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are spares designed for temporary emergency use only. Temporary high pressure
5
358 STARTING AND OPERATING
compact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded • High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
into the sidewall preceding the size designation.
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T or S = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING 359
EXAMPLE:
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
— ⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
5
360 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load (LL) = Light load tire
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load— Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure— Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for
this tire
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire, tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
STARTING AND OPERATING 361
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the
year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
5
362 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term
B-Pillar
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Maximum Inflation Pressure
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Tire Placard
Definition
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body
located behind the front door.
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after
the vehicle has not been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a three hour period.
Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible
cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation
pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation
pressure as shown on the tire placard.
A paper label permanently attached to the vehicle describing
the vehicle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes
and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
STARTING AND OPERATING 363
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
Tire And Loading Information Placard Location
Tire And Loading Information Placard
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s
side door.
5
Tire and Loading Information Placard
Tire Placard Location
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
364 STARTING AND OPERATING
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
Loading
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
STARTING AND OPERATING 365
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occusafely exceed the available cargo and luggage load
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
capacity calculated in Step 4.
XXX kg” on your vehicle’s placard.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
manual to determine how this reduces the available
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pascargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
sengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
“XXX” amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will
be five 150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity
is 650 lbs (295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750
= 650 lbs [295 kg]).
5
366 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 367
5
368 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause collisions.
• Under-inflation increases tire flexing and can result in over-heating and tire failure.
• Over-inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Over-inflated or under-inflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 369
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle
to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the
right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of
sluggish response or over responsiveness in the steering.
Unequal tire pressures can cause erratic and unpredictable steering response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the
vehicle to drift left or right.
Economy
Tire Inflation Pressures
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal wear
patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for earlier
tire replacement. Under-inflation also increases tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side
door.
The tire pressure should be checked and adjusted as well
as inspected for signs of tire wear or visible damage at
least once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
to check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable
properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.
ride. Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the
5
370 STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent
moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,
which could damage the valve stem.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not outside temperature condition.
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum infla- build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
tion pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
STARTING AND OPERATING 371
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
Radial Ply Tires
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
WARNING!
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Alloading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera- ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire combine them with other types of tires.
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
and cold tire inflation pressures.
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
All Season Tires – If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (spring,
summer, fall and winter). Traction levels may vary between different all season tires. All season tires can be
identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on
5
372 STARTING AND OPERATING
the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four; If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
handling of your vehicle.
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires – If Equipped
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
on ice. Summer tires will not contain the all season
(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
sidewall. Use summer tires only in sets of four; failure to
recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold
do so may adversely affect the safety and handling of
tire inflation pressures.
your vehicle.
While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid
Snow Tires
and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states produring the winter. Snow tires can be identified by a hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall.
STARTING AND OPERATING 373
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And
Wheel – If Equipped
CAUTION!
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
wheel equivalent in look and function to the original your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a
equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle compact, full size or limited-use temporary spare
of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire installed. Damage to the vehicle may result.
rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option
Compact Spare Tire – If Equipped
refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.
tire rotation pattern.
You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a
If your vehicle is not equipped with an original equipcompact spare by looking at the spare tire description on
ment tire and wheel as a spare, a non-matching tempothe Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the
rary emergency use spare may be equipped with your
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.
vehicle. Temporary use spares are engineered to be used
Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”
only with your vehicle. Your vehicle may be equipped
or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/
with one of the following types of non-matching tempo80D18 103M.
rary use spares; compact, full size, or limited-use. Do not
install more than one non-matching temporary use spare T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
tire/wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
5
374 STARTING AND OPERATING
Since this tire has limited tread life the original equip- Full Size Spare – If Equipped
ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.
on your vehicle at the first opportunity.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire on the
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire. to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
Do not install more than one compact spare tire and spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the
first opportunity.
WARNING!
Compact spares are for temporary emergency use
only. With these spares, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited
tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear
indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which
apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Limited-Use Spare – If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire is identified by a label located on the
limited-use spare wheel. This label contains the driving
limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as
STARTING AND OPERATING 375
your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the Tire Spinning
original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
first opportunity.
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or
for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopWARNING!
ping when you are stuck.
Limited-use spares are for emergency use only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the
speed listed on the limit-use spare wheel. Keep
inflated to the cold tire inflation pressure listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening. Replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do so could
result in loss of vehicle control.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continuously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
5
376 STARTING AND OPERATING
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
to help you in determining when your tires should be becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
replaced.
Life Of Tire
Tread Wear Indicators
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
• Distance driven
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or
higher, and summer tires, typically have a reduced
tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle maintenance schedule is highly recommended.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
STARTING AND OPERATING 377
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have a collision resulting
in serious injury or death.
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The Load Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall. See the
Tire Sizing Chart example found in the Tire Safety
Information section of this manual for more information
relating to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a
wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
those of the original wheels.
Replacement Tires
It is recommended you contact your original equipment
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for have on tire specifications or capability. Failure to use
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu- equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva- safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
5
378 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may
result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)
Due to limited clearance, tire chains or traction devices
are not recommended.
CAUTION!
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
STARTING AND OPERATING 379
The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”
shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle operate at
does not apply to some directional tires that must not be
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
reversed.
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates.
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
5
Tire Rotation
380 STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom- limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
mended cold placard pressure.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based on
“cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a
three hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must
not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into
the tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
“Starting and Operating” for information on how to
properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will
also increase as the vehicle is driven - this is normal and
there should be no adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
STARTING AND OPERATING 381
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire sealants
or balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
5
382 STARTING AND OPERATING
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
the tire.
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
Base System
or condition.
NOTE:
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
STARTING AND OPERATING 383
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
Check TPMS Warnings
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, a LOW TIRE message will
be displayed for a minimum of five seconds, and an
audible chime will be activated when one or more of the
four active road tire pressures are low. Should this occur,
you should stop as soon as possible, check the inflation
pressure of each tire on your vehicle, and inflate each tire
to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value. The system will automatically update and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish and the LOW
TIRE message will turn off once the updated tire pressures have been received. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to
receive this information.
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5
384 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
wheel and tire assembly.
solid.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monireinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnwarning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
and LOW TIRE message will still turn ON due to the
receive this information.
low tire.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid.
STARTING AND OPERATING 385
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
Center (EVIC)
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure
levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the • Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
valve stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
module.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illumiNOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
nate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
the proper pressure.
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
The TPMS consists of the following components:
every ignition cycle for the first condition that it detects.
In addition, the EVIC will display a “LOW TIRE” text
• Receiver Module
message for a minimum of five seconds and a graphic of
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
the pressure value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
Premium System – If Equipped
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
5
386 STARTING AND OPERATING
“LOW TIRE” text message will no longer be displayed,
the graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop
flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will
extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been
received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) to receive this
information.
Service TPMS Message
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds. This text
message is then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“
in place of the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire
Pressure Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
STARTING AND OPERATING 387
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the
TPM sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
The EVIC will also display a ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message for a minimum of five seconds when a system
fault related to an incorrect sensor location fault is
detected. In this case, the ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙
message is then followed with a graphic display with
5
388 STARTING AND OPERATING
pressure values still shown. This indicates that the pres- 3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minsure values are still being received from the TPM sensors
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for
but they may not be located in the correct vehicle
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In addition, the
position. The system still needs to be serviced as long as
EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” mesthe ⬙SERVICE TPM SYSTEM⬙ message is displayed.
sage for a minimum of five seconds and then display
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure values.
wheel and tire assembly.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not moniwill flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
tor the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
solid, and the EVIC will display a “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message for a minimum of five seconds and
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warnvalues.
ing limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire. The “LOW TIRE”
text message and the graphic with the low tire pressure flashing will be displayed.
STARTING AND OPERATING 389
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as
long as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure
warning limit in any of the four active road tires. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States
Canada
KR5S18002015B
267T-S180015B
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L And 2.4L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all emissions regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
high-quality unleaded “regular” gasoline
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
having an octane rating of 87. The use of
following conditions:
premium gasoline is not recommended, as it will not
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
provide any benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
• This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
General Information
5
390 STARTING AND OPERATING
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required. Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these symptoms, try another brand of gasoline
before considering service for the vehicle.
Over 40 auto manufacturers worldwide have issued and
endorsed consistent gasoline specifications (the Worldwide Fuel Charter, WWFC) which define fuel properties
necessary to deliver enhanced emissions, performance,
and durability for your vehicle. The manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline.”
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates and are specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and improve air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gasolines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will provide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as Ethanol. Fuels blended with oxygenates
may be used in your vehicle.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasoline containing Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol. Use of these
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 391
CAUTION! (Continued)
blends may result in starting and driveability problems, damage critical fuel system components, cause
emissions to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to illuminate. Pump labels should clearly communicate if a
fuel contains greater than 10% Ethanol.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
• operate in a lean mode
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
Problems that result from using gasoline containing • increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
Methanol or gasoline containing more than 10% Ethanol To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may E-85 perform the following:
not be covered under warranty.
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
• change the engine oil and oil filter
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol • disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
5
392 STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added To Fuel
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline
blended with MMT provides no performance advantage
beyond gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug
life and reduces emissions system performance in some
vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline
without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content
of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,
therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether
the gasoline contains MMT. It is even more important to
look for gasoline without MMT in Canada, because MMT
can be used at levels higher than those allowed in the
United States. MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasoline.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and they would result in additional cost.
Therefore, you should not have to add anything to the
fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance and damage the emissions control system.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 393
CAUTION! (Continued)
• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune
or malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact your authorized dealer for service
assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being
sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.
Most of these products contain high concentrations
of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems resulting from the use of such
fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the
manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control
system can result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can
kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as
a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into
the vehicle.
(Continued)
5
394 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every
time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal
conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive
with all side windows fully open.
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING 395
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could
let impurities into the fuel system.
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and federal fire regulations and may cause the MIL to turn on.
• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on
the ground while filling.
NOTE:
WARNING!
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank
is full.
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the
vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is
being filled.
• Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you hear one
click. This is an indication that cap is properly tightened.
(Continued)
• If the gas cap is not tightened properly, the MIL will
come on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time
the vehicle is refueled.
5
396 STARTING AND OPERATING
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
Vehicle Certification Label
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Description” in “Understanding Your Instrument
Panel” for further information. Tighten the fuel filler cap
properly and press the odometer/trip odometer RESET
button to turn the message off. If the problem continues,
the message will appear the next time the vehicle is
started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic System” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
VEHICLE LOADING
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin- Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
STARTING AND OPERATING 397
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Inflation Pressure
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle. This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total all loading conditions up to full GAWR.
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
Curb Weight
GVWR.
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
Tire Size
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
Rim Size
added.
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
Overloading
listed.
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
5
398 STARTING AND OPERATING
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
Loading
TRAILER TOWING
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully
review this information to tow your load as efficiently
and safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
STARTING AND OPERATING 399
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
supported by the scale.
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
Common Towing Definitions
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle
Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for
further information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: The GCWR rating includes a 150 lbs (68 kg)
allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or
rear GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
5
400 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have a collision.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Tongue Weight (TW)
Weight-Carrying Hitch
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds
of hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they are commonly used to tow small- and mediumsized trailers.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the
Weight-Distributing Hitch
maximum width of the front of a trailer.
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
STARTING AND OPERATING 401
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturers’ directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control, thereby enhancing
towing safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway
control also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds, and contributes positively to tow vehicle and
trailer stability. A friction/hydraulic sway control mechanism and a weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch
are recommended for heavier trailer tongue weights
(TW) and may be required depending on Vehicle and
Trailer configuration/loading to comply with gross axle
weight rating (GAWR) requirements.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch
Industry Standards
I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
II - Medium Duty
3,500 lbs (1 587 kg)
III - Heavy Duty
5,000 lbs (2 268 kg)
IV - Extra Heavy
10,000 lbs (4 540 kg)
Class
Class
Class
Class
Duty
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed
on your vehicle.
5
402 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight
Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer
weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
2.0L Auto/Man
2.4L Auto/Man
2.4L Auto With Freedom
Drive II Off Road
Package (AWL)
Frontal Area
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
100 lbs (45 kg)
100 lbs (45 kg)
200 lbs (91 kg)
STARTING AND OPERATING 403
NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) on the tow hitch of your
vehicle. Loads balanced over the wheels or heavier in the
rear can cause the trailer to sway severely side to side Consider the following items when computing the
which will cause loss of control of the vehicle and trailer. weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
Failure to load trailers heavier in front is the cause of • The tongue weight of the trailer.
many trailer collisions.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
put in or on your vehicle.
your bumper or trailer hitch.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
5
404 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must
be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information” placard for
the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo
for your vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a
trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps
the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
Perform the maintenance listed in the “Maintenance
Schedule.” Refer to “Maintenance Schedule” for further
To promote proper break-in of your vehicle drivetrain
information. When towing a trailer, never exceed the
components, the following guidelines are recommended:
GAWR, or GCWR, ratings.
Towing Requirements
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle
or other parts could be damaged.
(Continued)
Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these
guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as
possible:
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING 405
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have a collision.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not
overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can
cause a loss of control, poor performance or damage to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,
suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to
the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch.
Cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow
enough slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a
grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on
the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic
transmission in PARK. Always block or ⴖchockⴖ the
trailer wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
(Continued)
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized.
5
406 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements – Tires
• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher
load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Brakes
• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to • Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
“Tires – General Information” in “Starting and OperThis could cause inadequate braking and possible
ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.
personal injury.
• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
sures before trailer usage.
required when towing a trailer with electronically
• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
Information” in “Starting and Operating” for the
brake controller is not required.
proper inspection procedure.
• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor1,000 lbs (454 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
mation” in “Starting and Operating” for the proper tire
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
STARTING AND OPERATING 407
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (454 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle
in front of you. Failure to do so could result in a
collision.
Towing Requirements – Trailer Lights And Wiring
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have a
collision.
(Continued)
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and sevenpin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles
wiring harness.
5
408 STARTING AND OPERATING
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
Seven-Pin Connector
Four-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
STARTING AND OPERATING 409
NOTE: Using a lower gear ratio while operating the
vehicle under heavy loading conditions, will improve
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping,
performance and extend transmission life by reducing
and backing up the trailer in an area located away from
excessive shifting and heat buildup. This action will also
heavy traffic.
provide better engine braking.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
If you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more than 45 minIf using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing, utes of continuous operation, then change the transmisall starts must be in first gear to avoid excessive clutch sion fluid and filter as specified for ⬙police, taxi, fleet, or
slippage.
frequent trailer towing.⬙ Refer to the ⬙Maintenance
Schedule⬙ for the proper maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Towing Tips
The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. However, if frequent shifting or changes in engine speed occur
while in this range, use the AutoStick威 shift control (if
equipped) to select a lower gear ratio.
AutoStick威 - If Equipped
When using the AutoStick威 shift control, select the highest gear that allows for adequate performance and avoids
frequent downshifts. For example, choose ⬙4⬙ if the
desired speed can be maintained. Choose ⬙3⬙ or ⬙2⬙ if
needed to maintain the desired speed.
5
410 STARTING AND OPERATING
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid continuous
driving at high RPM. Reduce vehicle speed as necessary
to avoid extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and road
conditions allow.
Cooling System
Electronic Speed Control – If Equipped
When stopped for short periods of time, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.
• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
Highway Driving
• When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until Reduce speed.
you can get back to cruising speed.
Air Conditioning
• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
Turn off temporarily.
maximize fuel efficiency.
STARTING AND OPERATING 411
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
None
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
All
On Trailer
Manual Transmission
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• Key in ACC Position
OK (FWD Only)
NOT ALLOWED
OK
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transmissions
may be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal
highway speed, for any distance, if the manual transmission is in NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC
position.
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
OK (FWD Only)
NOT ALLOWED
OK
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result. If these vehicles require towing, make
sure all drive wheels are OFF the ground.
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Internal
damage to the transmission or transfer case will
occur if a dolly is used when recreational towing.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .414 䡵 JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES. . . . . . . . . . . .424
䡵 IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .414
▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
䡵 JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .415
▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 䡵 FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417 䡵 TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .434
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
▫ Road Tire Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
6
414 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
instrument panel, below the radio.
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc- • On the highways — slow down.
tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming • In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission
traffic of an emergency. Press the switch a second time to
in NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
This is an emergency warning system and it should not an impending overheat condition:
be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your
vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for • If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C
system adds heat to the engine cooling system and
other motorists.
turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the
Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even • You can also turn the temperature control to maximum
heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control
though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.
to high. This allows the heater core to act as a
NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers
supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
may wear down your battery.
from the engine cooling system.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 415
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage your
vehicle. If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the
instrument cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull
over and stop the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn
off the air conditioning and wait until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the H (red) mark for more than a minute, turn the
engine off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had time
to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is
on a jack.
(Continued)
6
416 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be used to
lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle
should be jacked on a firm level surface only.
Avoid ice or slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire And Jack Stowage
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 417
Spare Tire Stowage
3. Set the parking brake.
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor 4. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transmission)
in the cargo area.
or REVERSE (manual transmission).
Spare Tire Removal
5. Turn OFF the ignition.
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally
opposite the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right front
tire, block the left rear wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
6
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
418 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Jacking Instructions
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the
edge of the roadway as possible before raising the
vehicle.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
(Continued)
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for
lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing out.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 419
Jack Warning Label
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in the Jacking
Instructions for this vehicle.
6
Jacking Locations
NOTE: Refer to “Tires — General Information” in “Starting And Operating” for further information about the
spare tire, it’s use, and operation.
420 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the
left to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench
from the jack assembly.
NOTE: The jack handle attaches to the side of the jack
with two attachment points. When the jack is partially
expanded, the tension between the two attachment
points holds the jack handle in place.
Removing Jack Handle From Jack
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 421
NOTE: There are front and rear jacking locations on each
side of the body. The front locations are outlined by two
triangular cutouts on one of the flanges in the sill flange
assembly. The rear location is the same but with two
rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped with plastic
trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose the jacking
locations in the body.
6
Front Jacking Location
422 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the
jack head is properly engaged with the lift area closest
to the wheel to be changed.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
Rear Jacking Location
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
4. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until
the tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 423
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until the vehicle
has been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
6
Mounting Spare Tire
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve stem
facing outward. The vehicle could be damaged if the
spare tire is mounted incorrectly.
424 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Release the parking brake. Reassemble the lug
wrench to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare tire
area. Secure the assembly using the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench 9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has
been tightened twice. The correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service
station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 425
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
10. Check the spare tire pressure as soon as possible.
Correct the tire pressure as required.
Road Tire Installation
6
Vehicles Equipped With Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
Tire And Wheel Cover Or Center Cap
1 — Valve Stem
2. Align the valve notch in the wheel cover with the 2 — Valve Notch
valve stem on the wheel. Install the cover by hand. Do 3 — Wheel Lug Nut
not use a hammer or excessive force to install the
cover.
4 — Wheel Cover
5 — Road Wheel
426 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
3. Install the five wheel lug nuts with the cone shaped 6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
lug nuts.
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has
been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
result in personal injury.
4. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
Vehicles Without Wheel Covers
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone shaped
end of the nut toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the
lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,
5. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the vehicle has
while at the end of the handle for increased leverage. been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may
Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has result in personal injury.
been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug
nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt about the correct 3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning the jack
tightness, have them checked with a torque wrench by
handle counterclockwise.
your authorized dealer or service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 427
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack
wrench while at the end of the handle for increased follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and
leverage. Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until precautions.
each nut has been tightened twice. The correct tightness of each lug nut is 100 ft/lbs (135 N·m). If in doubt
CAUTION!
about the correct tightness, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your authorized dealer or service Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any
other booster source with a system voltage greater
station.
than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,
5. After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut torque with a alternator or electrical system may occur.
torque wrench to ensure that all lug nuts are properly
seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jumpstarted using a set of jumper cables and a battery in
another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster
pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly
so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.
Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.
It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.
6
428 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Preparations For Jump-Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the
engine compartment below the air intake duct. To access
the battery remove the air intake duct by turning the two
finger screws, located on the radiator support.
Positive Battery Post
Air Intake Finger Screws
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 429
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as watch bands or
bracelets that might make an inadvertent electrical
contact. You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your
skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is
flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or
sparks away from the battery.
1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission
into PARK (manual transmission to NEUTRAL) and
turn the ignition to LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park
the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the
parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this
could establish a ground connection and personal
injury could result.
Jump-Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this procedure could result in personal injury or property damage due to battery explosion.
6
430 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could result in
damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle
or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE: Remove Air Intake before proceeding with this
Jump-Starting procedure.
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the
positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper
cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of
the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the cable to the negative post (-) of the
discharged battery. The resulting electrical spark
could cause the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable to the
start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged
negative (-) post of the booster battery.
battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 431
Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables in
the reverse sequence:
6. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper cable from the
engine ground of the vehicle with the discharged
battery.
7. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable
from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
CAUTION!
Accessories that can be plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery
life and/or prevent the engine from starting.
8. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper
cable from the positive (+) post of the booster battery. FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
9. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable
can often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the
from the positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around
10. Reinstall the air intake duct.
the front wheels. Then shift back and forth between
If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle DRIVE and REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or
you should have the battery and charging system in- 2nd gear and REVERSE (with manual transmission),
while gently pressing the accelerator. Use the least
spected at your authorized dealer.
amount of accelerator pedal pressure that will maintain
6
432 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the rocking motion, without spinning the wheels, or
racing the engine.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to
transmission overheating and failure. Allow the engine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at
least one minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce
the risk of transmission failure during prolonged
efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
NOTE: Press the ⬙ESC Off⬙ switch, to place the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system in ⬙Partial Off⬙ mode,
before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake
Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further information. Once the vehicle has been freed, press the ⬙ESC
Off⬙ switch again to restore ⬙ESC On⬙ mode.
CAUTION!
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting between DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin
the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transmission overheating and failure.
It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission shifting occurring).
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or
even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could
(Continued)
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 433
WARNING! (Continued)
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for
longer than 30 seconds continuously without stopping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near
a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
SHIFT LEVER OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs and the shift lever cannot be
moved out of the PARK position, you can use the
following procedure to temporarily move the shift lever:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
6
Shift Lever Override Access Cover
4. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON/RUN
position, but do not start the engine.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the 5. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.
shift lever override access cover (located on the right
side of the shifter housing).
434 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
6. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access 7. Move the shift lever to the NEUTRAL position.
port, and push and hold the override release lever 8. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.
forward.
9. Reinstall the shift lever override access cover.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled
vehicle using a towing service.
Towing Condition
Flat Tow
Wheels OFF the Ground
NONE
Wheel Lift or
Dolly Tow
Front
Rear
ALL
Flatbed
Manual Transmission
• Transmission in NEUTRAL
• Key in ACC or ON/RUN
position
FWD Models ONLY
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
Automatic Transmission
NOT ALLOWED
FWD Models ONLY
NOT ALLOWED
BEST METHOD
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 435
Manual Transmission
With Ignition Key
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels OFF the ground).
• FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
• Four-Wheel Drive (4WD) vehicles must be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels OFF the ground).
• FWD or 4WD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels OFF the ground).
Automatic Transmission
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above requirements can cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any disabled vehicle if condition
is related to the clutch, transmission or driveline.
Additional damage to the drivetrain could result.
6
436 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
All Transmissions
Without The Ignition Key
If you must use the accessories (wipers, defroster, etc.)
while being towed, the key must be in the ON/RUN
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK/OFF position. The only
approved method of towing without the ignition key is
with a flatbed truck. Proper towing equipment is necesIf the battery is discharged, see “Shift Lever Override” in sary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
“What To Do In Emergencies” for instructions on shifting
the automatic transmission out of PARK for towing.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use sling-type equipment when towing.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed truck, do not
attach to front or rear suspension components. Damage to your vehicle may result from improper towing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . .439
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
䡵 ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . .440
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
䡵 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II . . .441
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .441
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
䡵 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
䡵 REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
䡵 MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .444
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
7
438 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Automatic Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . .464 䡵 BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Manual Transmission – If Equipped . . . . . . . .466
▫ Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
▫ Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) –
AWD/4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Power Transfer Unit (PTU) –
AWD/4WD Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
▫ Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps . . .480
▫ License Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp . . . . . . . . . .480
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468 䡵 FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
䡵 FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473 䡵 FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS . .482
▫ Integrated Power Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .482
䡵 VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
䡵 REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 439
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
7
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
440 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module (Fuses)
6
7
8
9
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Coolant Pressure Cap
— Engine Oil Dipstick
— Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 441
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light” (MIL).
It will also store diagnostic codes and other information
to assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system.
It could also affect fuel economy and drivability.
The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
7
442 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position, but do not
crank or start the engine.
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
2. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction 3. As soon as you turn the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
position, you will see the MIL symbol come on as part
on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
of a normal bulb check.
system is ready for testing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 443
4. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
happen:
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should running.
not proceed to the I/M station.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was warranty.
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
DEALER SERVICE
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personsystem to update. A recheck with the above test routine nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
7
444 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
available which include detailed service information for MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
attempting any procedure yourself.
services determined by the engineers who designed your
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control vehicle.
systems may void your warranty and could result in civil Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed
penalties being assessed against you.
maintenance schedule, there are other components which
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
may require servicing or replacement in the future.
CAUTION!
• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or perform repairs and service when necessary could
result in more costly repairs, damage to other
components or negatively impact vehicle performance. Immediately have potential malfunctions
examined by an authorized dealer or qualified
repair center.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 445
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids
that protect the performance and durability of your
vehicle and also allow extended maintenance intervals. Do not use chemical flushes in these components as the chemicals can damage your engine,
transmission, power steering or air conditioning.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. If a flush is needed because of
component malfunction, use only the specified
fluid for the flushing procedure.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop. The best time to
check the engine oil level is about five minutes after a
fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not check oil level
before starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
Checking engine oil level when the engine is cold will
give you an incorrect reading.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch
zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and MAX at
the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil when the
reading is at the low end of the indicated range will result
in the oil level at the full end of the indicator range.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
(Continued)
7
446 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION! (Continued)
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine. Also, be sure the oil fill
cap is replaced and tightened after adding oil.
Change Engine Oil
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further information.
NOTE:Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever occurs first.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet
the requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the
chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 447
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating performance may be impaired by supplemental additives.
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
grade for your engine.
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi- environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num- station or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
ber should not be used.
your area.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom- Engine Oil Filter
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom- The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter
mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes at every engine oil change.
are followed.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
Materials Added To Engine Oil
This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the ad- filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality
dition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high
7
448 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quality filters should be used to assure most efficient Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are a high quality oil The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
filter and are recommended.
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recomRefer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
mended.
maintenance intervals.
Maintenance-Free Battery
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can
provide a measure of protection in the case of engine
backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air
cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary
for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is
near the engine compartment before starting the
vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,
hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 449
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water. Refer to
“Jump-Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In
Emergencies” for further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
(Continued)
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and are identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables before connecting the charger to the battery. Do not
use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
7
450 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning
system as the chemicals can damage your air conditioning components. Such damage is not covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,
for further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced technician.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 451
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Do not remove the A/C air filter while the blower is
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How- operating or personal injury may result.
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet behind
service be performed by authorized dealer or other
the glove box. Perform the following procedure to reservice facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
place the filter:
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
1. Open the glove compartment and remove all contents.
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
2. Push in on the sides of the glove compartment and
oil, and refrigerants.
lower the door.
A/C Air Filter
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that secure the filter
cover to the HVAC housing, and remove the cover.
7
452 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
6. Install the A/C air filter with the arrow on the filter
pointing toward the floor. When installing the filter
cover, make sure the retaining tabs fully engage the
cover.
CAUTION!
The A/C air filter is identified with an arrow to
indicate airflow direction through the filter. Failure
to properly install the filter will result in the need to
replace it more often.
A/C Air Filter Replacement
7. Rotate the glove compartment door back into position.
5. Remove the A/C air filter by pulling it straight out of Body Lubrication
the housing.
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease, such as
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 453
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to ensure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from
the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depending
on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor perforThe external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
mance of blades may be present with chattering, marks,
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions are
amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR威
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as necessary.
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Adding Washer Fluid
Windshield Wiper Blades
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the engine
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
compartment, and the fluid level should be checked at
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with windshield
mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumulawasher solvent only (not radiator antifreeze).
tions of salt or road film.
7
454 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some
washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe
clean the wiper blades, this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system
in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or
exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This
rating information can be found on most washer fluid
containers.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;
or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;
or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 455
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious
and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing
CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things
To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further
information.
• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park
over materials that can burn. Such materials might
be grass or leaves coming into contact with your
exhaust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas where your exhaust system can contact anything that can burn.
• The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the
effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control
device and may seriously reduce engine performance and cause serious damage to the engine.
• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.
In the event of engine malfunction, particularly
involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of
performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.
Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
7
456 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con- To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter damverter will not require maintenance. However, it is im- age:
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure • Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in
damage.
motion.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control • Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
vehicle.
against you.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
idle or malfunctioning operating conditions.
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifications, should be obtained immediately.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 457
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
• You or others can be badly burned by hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If
you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,
do not open the hood until the radiator has had
time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection at the
bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks.
Cooling System – Drain, Flush, And Refill
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of the old engine coolant (antifreeze) solution.
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where maintenance intervals.
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
7
458 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Selection Of Coolant
CAUTION! (Continued)
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should not be mixed with
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, it should be replaced with
the specified engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as
possible.
(Continued)
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to ten years or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 459
period, it is important that you use the same engine Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maincoolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your vehicle. tain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
Please review these recommendations for using Organic
the vehicle is operated.
Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze).
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
recommended and can result in cooling system damage.
• We recommend using MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant
Drain, flush, and refill as soon as possible to avoid
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive
damage if coolant types are mixed in an emergency.
Technology).
Cooling System Pressure Cap
• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant
and distilled water. Use higher concentrations (not to The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34° F (−37° C) are coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
anticipated.
recovery bottle.
• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized water when mixing the water/engine coolant The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
(antifreeze) solution. The use of lower quality water accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
will reduce the amount of corrosion protection in the
engine cooling system.
7
460 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on the
cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when the
engine is overheated. Do not loosen or remove the
cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or pet, seek
emergency assistance immediately. Clean up any ground
spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
with your local authorities to determine the disposal (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 461
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory, • Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)
needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
bottle must also be protected against freezing.
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
required, the cooling system should be pressure tested
Points To Remember
for leaks.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/ • Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
50% OAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum) and
from the front of the engine compartment. This is nordistilled water for proper corrosion protection of your
mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
engine which contains aluminum components.
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine • Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow
hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no • Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
condenser clean.
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
7
462 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install ONLY
the correct type thermostat. Other designs may result in
unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze) performance,
poor gas mileage, and increased emissions.
Brake System
WARNING! (Continued)
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
system components should be inspected periodically. when performing under hood services, or immediately if
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper the brake system warning light is on.
maintenance intervals.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
WARNING!
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 463
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transmission, the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transmission clutch release system should not require
fluid replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the
brake fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does
not indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a
result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See
your local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further
information. Using the wrong type of brake fluid
can severely damage your brake system and/or
impair its performance. The proper type of brake
fluid for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic master cylinder
reservoir.
(Continued)
7
464 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or
moisture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has
been in a tightly closed container. Keep the master
cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake
fluid in a open container absorbs moisture from the
air resulting in a lower boiling point. This may
cause it to boil unexpectedly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in sudden brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing
the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also
damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be
taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate
the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be
damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.
This could result in a collision.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall clutch
system performance. Improper brake fluids may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of clutch function and the ability to shift the transmission.
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant (CVT)
It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to
ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 465
fluid which has the special friction coefficient additives
necessary for proper steel belt traction on the drive and
driven pulleys. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain the transmission fluid at
the correct level using the recommended fluid.
No chemical flushes should be used in any transmission;
only the approved lubricant should be used.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for fluid specifications.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends against using
any special additives in the transmission.
Automatic transmission fluid is an engineered product
and its performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to
the transmission. The only exception to this policy is the
use of special dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks. Avoid
using transmission sealers as they may adversely affect
seals.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as
the chemicals can damage your transmission components. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
7
466 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Fluid Level Check
Fluid And Filter Changes
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not
require adjustment under normal operating conditions.
Routine fluid level checks are not required, therefore the
transmission has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can
check your transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction, visit you authorized dealer immediately to have the
fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmission damage.
Refer to the ⬙Maintenance Schedule⬙ for the proper
maintenance intervals. In addition, change the fluid and
filter if the transmission is disassembled for any reason.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your authorized dealer immediately. Severe transmission damage may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper
tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more than 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom
of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 467
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained between the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the fill hole.
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubri- Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
cant has become contaminated with water.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
changed immediately.
maintenance intervals.
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA) – AWD/4WD Models
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – AWD/4WD Models
Only
Only
Lubricant Selection
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
Use only the manufacturer’s recommended fluid. Refer
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in “Maintain“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
ing Your Vehicle” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Fluid Level Check
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.
Visually inspect the unit at each oil change for leakage.
If leakage is detected, check the fluid level by removing
If leakage is detected, Check the fluid level by removing
Frequency Of Fluid Change
7
468 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
the fill plug. The fluid level should be maintained be- hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
tween the bottom of the fill hole to 1/8 in (4 mm) below have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
the fill hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper
What Causes Corrosion?
maintenance intervals.
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on • Stone and gravel impact.
trees and road surfaces during other seasons are highly • Insects, tree sap and tar.
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants, • Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme • Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 469
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash, or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder that will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)
can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
Special Care
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR威 • If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.
a month.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing • It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.
of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and
open.
7
470 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint, Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
• All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
considered the responsibility of the owner.
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar
with a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion.
cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,
• To remove heavy soil and/or excessive brake dust, use
have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The
MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner.
cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,
or metal polishes. Do not use oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel’s protective finish.
Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic solutions
or harsh brushes that may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Only MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 471
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure – If
Equipped
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man- carpeting.
ner:
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
with a clean, dry towel.
leather upholstery.
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean, or a cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue. and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
protectants on Stain Repel products.
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
7
472 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner, or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
Cleaning Headlights
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and not use scrapers or other sharp instrument that may
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights. scratch the elements.
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
towel or rag that you are using. Do not spray cleaner
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and directly on the mirror.
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. Instrument Panel Cover
To remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
followed by rinsing.
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel protectants or other products which may cause undesirwool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 473
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye, or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use MOPAR威 Total Clean, a
mild soap solution, or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are buckles do not work properly.
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
FUSES
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Integrated Power Module
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive The Integrated Power Module is located in the engine
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This center
contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label that
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
474 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
identifies each component may be printed on the inside
of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.
Cavity
1
2
3
4
5
Integrated Power Module
6
Cartridge
Fuse
Empty
MiniFuse
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
Description
Empty
AWD/4WD Control
Module – If Equipped
Rear Center Brake
Light Switch
Ignition Switch/
Occupant Classification Module
Trailer Tow –
If Equipped
Power Mirror/
Steering Control
Satellite Radio/
Hands-Free Phone
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 475
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
30 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Green
Ignition Off Draw
14
Ignition Off Draw
15
Power Seats
16
15 Amp
Lt Blue
Power Locks/Interior
Lighting
Power Outlet
17
10 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
20 Amp
Yellow
20 Amp
Yellow
18
115V AC Inverter –
If Equipped
Cigar Lighter
19
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
Instrument Cluster
40 Amp
Green
Radiator Fan
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
Dome Lamp/
Sunroof/Rear Wiper
Motor
Wireless Control
Module
Auto Shutdown Relay
Radio Amplifiers
7
476 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
Description
Cavity
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt Blue
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
15 Amp
Lt Blue
Radio
27
Intrusion Module/
Siren – If Equipped
Heating, AC/Compass
28
Cartridge
Fuse
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
Airbag Control
Module
Airbag Control
Module/Occupant
Classification Module
Hot Car (No Fuse
Required)
Heated Seat –
If Equipped
Headlamp Washer –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown Relay
29
Auto Shutdown Relay
30
Power Sunroof –
If Equipped
Heated Mirror –
If Equipped
Auto Shutdown Relay
20 Amp
Yellow
10 Amp
Red
31
32
30 Amp
Pink
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 477
Cavity
Cartridge
Fuse
33
34
35
36
37
MiniFuse
Description
10 Amp
Red
J1962 Conn/
Powertrain Control
Module
Antilock BrakeValve
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Antilock Brake Pump
25 Amp
Natural
Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass –
If Equipped
Diesel Fuel Heater –
If Equipped
CAUTION!
• When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get into
the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If
a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates
a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
7
478 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE STORAGE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
battery.
be used for replacement.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Interior Bulbs
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Or disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
• Anytime you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the
air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes
in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will
ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the system is
started again.
Front Header Lamp
Center Dome Lamp
Rear Cargo Lamp/
Flashlight
Bulb Number
T578
T578
8–A35LF
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 479
Exterior Bulbs
Low Beam/High Beam
Headlamp
Front Park/Turn Signal/
Side Marker Lamp
Front Fog Lamp
Center High Mounted
Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
Rear Tail/Turn/Stop
Lamp
Backup Lamp
License Lamp
BULB REPLACEMENT
Bulb Number
H13
3757KA
PSX24W
LED Assembly (Serviced
At Authorized Dealer)
3157
W16W (921)
W5W
Headlamps
1. Raise the hood and locate the connector behind the
headlamp.
2. Reach into engine compartment and pull red lock out
at connector.
3. Remove the green connector from the back of the bulb
by pulling straight back.
4. Twist the bulb to the left.
5. Pull bulb outward from assembly.
NOTE: These are halogen bulbs. Take care not to touch
the bulb with your fingers. Body oils from your fingers
could cause excessive heat buildup which reduces bulb
life.
7
480 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Grasp the taillamp and pull firmly to disengage the
light from the aperture panel.
Refer to the Service Manual or see your authorized dealer
for bulb replacement.
4. Twist and remove socket from the light.
Fog Lamps
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Oil
contamination will severely shorten bulb life. If the
bulb comes in contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
5. Remove bulb from socket and replace.
License Lamps
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
Rear Tail, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
1. Raise the liftgate.
Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
2. Remove the two push-pins from the taillamp housing. This light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 481
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S.
Fuel (Approximate)
13.6 Gallons
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine
4.5 Quarts
(SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine
7.2 Quarts
(MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Engine
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Metric
51.5 Liters
4.26 Liters
6.8 Liters
7
482 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-12106.
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the
requirements of Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Spark Plugs (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 483
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transmission (CVT) – If Equipped
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
Rear Drive Assembly (RDA)
Power Transfer Unit (PTU)
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
We recommend you use MOPAR威 CVTF+4威 Continuously
Variable Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Gear & Axle Lubricant
SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 Gear & Axle Lubricant
SAE 80W-90 API GL 5.
We recommend you use MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should
be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then
DOT 4 is acceptable.
We recommend you useMOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4,
MOPAR威 ATF+4威 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
7
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
▫ Maintenance Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488 N
C
E
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
486 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be disYour vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change
played in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicator system. The oil change indicator system will
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for
scheduled maintenance.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
indicator message will illuminate. This means that service is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a
cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re- than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
quired” message is displayed. Severe Operating Condi- referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle
tions can cause the change oil message to illuminate as Information Center (EVIC)/Oil Change Required” in
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset. Have your “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or under “Invehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the next strument Cluster Description/Odometer/Trip Odom500 miles (805 km).
eter” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 487 M
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or twelve months,
whichever comes first.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
•
•
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look for unusual
wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission as
needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior lights
Required Maintenance Intervals.
Refer to the maintenance schedules on the following
page for the required maintenance intervals.
•
•
•
•
•
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator
system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as
required
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses
and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and
hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or
off-road conditions
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
488 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
8
Maintenance Chart
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect front suspension, boot
seals. tie rod ends, and replace
if necessary.
Inspect the brake linings, parking
brake function.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter.
Replace air conditioning/cabin
air filter.
Replace spark plugs**
Flush and replace the engine
coolant at 10 years or
150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first.
Replace rear drive assembly
(RDA) fluid.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 489 M
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Replace power transfer unit
(PTU) fluid.
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter if using your
vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent
trailer towing.
Change the automatic
transmission fluid and filter.
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
M 490 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
Mileage or time passed
N
(whichever comes first)
T
E
N
Or Years:
A
Or
Kilometers:
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any
of the following: trailer towing,
heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or
more than 50% of your driving is
at sustained high speeds during
hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary.
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Or Years:
Or Kilometers:
20,000
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
32,000
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 491 M
X
** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,
yearly intervals do not apply.
X
X
X
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M 492 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
WARNING!
N
T
E • You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you
N
A
have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
N
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
C
service job, take your vehicle to a competent meE
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
chanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and
effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .495
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 䡵 WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 䡵 MOPAR威 PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
䡵 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495 䡵 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center. . . . . . .496
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C. . .499
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . .496
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
▫ In Mexico contact: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497 䡵 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .500
9
494 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .502
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 495
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealer, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have
the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
current problem.
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally
Prepare A List
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the with our products and services.
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
service advisor know.
authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and
are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the
9
496 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and • Authorized dealer name
the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed • Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
correctly and in a timely manner.
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re- Chrysler Group LLC Customer Center
solved with this process.
P.O. Box 21–8004
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.
Phone: (877) 426–5337
They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the concern, Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
you may contact the manufacturer’s customer center.
P.O. Box 1621
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen- Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
ter should include the following information:
Phone: (800) 465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 497
Mexico, D. F.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require
assistance can use the special needs relay service offered
by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711
and for Voice callers, dial 1 800 855-0511 to connect with
a Bell Relay Service operator.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Service Contract
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)
465–2001 English / (800) 387–9983 French).
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
9
498 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the
DVD, for the terms and provisions of Chrysler Group
LLC warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 499
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
MOPAR威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
dealer, and the manufacturer.
available from an authorized dealer. They are recommended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–
operating at its best.
9153), or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
West Building, Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could http://www.safercar.gov.
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety In Canada
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
manufacturer.
should contact the Customer Service Department immeIf NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in defect to the Canadian government should contact Transa group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy port Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and
Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety/
MOPAR姞 PARTS
9
500 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,
charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals
make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and
features. They show exactly how to find and correct
problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshootNOTE: A street address is required when ordering
ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
and a complete list of all tools and equipment.
Service Manuals
Owner’s Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the inforThese Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
mation that students and professional technicians need in
assistance of service and engineering specialists to acdiagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintainquaint you with specific Chrysler Group LLC vehicles.
ing, servicing, and repairing Chrysler Group LLC veIncluded are starting, operating, emergency and maintehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in straightforward nance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities
and safety tips.
language with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 501
Call toll free at:
Treadwear
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perforrequirements in addition to these grades.
mance.
9
502 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
504 INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
Airbag. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .448
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Air Conditioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Air Conditioning Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .296
Air Pressure, Tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Antenna, Satellite Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . .18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Assistance Towing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .300
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Fluid and Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466
INDEX 505
Fluid Level Check
Fluid Type . . . .
Gear Ranges . . .
Special Additives
Autostick . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.466
.464
.322
.465
.327
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .347
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
Warning Light . . . . . . . . .
Brake/Transmission Interlock .
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.215
.320
.478
.100
Calibration, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . .481
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Cargo Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Luggage Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
10
506 INDEX
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .200
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . . .442
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . .
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compass Variance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Connector
UCI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) .
Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . .
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.462
.462
.196
.315
.294
.373
.226
.237
.237
..
.
..
..
..
..
..
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.286
.286
.196
.497
.481
.459
.457
.458
.457
INDEX 507
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . .
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . .
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze)
Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . .
Cruise Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.460
.457
.460
.461
.459
.459
.458
.468
.219
.196
.495
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .339
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .329
Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443 Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . .
Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204 Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . .
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99 Electronic Brake Control System .
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . .
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Brake Assist System . . . . . . .
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Electronic Roll Mitigation . . .
Dimmer Switch, Headlight. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.188
.109
.346
.346
.347
.348
10
508 INDEX
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .172
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . . .228
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .442
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .457
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .439
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .71
Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . .
Air Conditioning . .
Engine Oil . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Disposal
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.448
.307
.447
.447
INDEX 509
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . .
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . .
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . . . .
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.414 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adding . . . . . . . . .
.414
Additives . . . . . . .
.100
Capacity . . . . . . . .
.315
Clean Air . . . . . . .
.483
Ethanol . . . . . . . . .
.481
Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
.101
Gasoline . . . . . . . .
Gauge . . . . . . . . . .
.466
Light . . . . . . . . . .
.457
Materials Added . .
.339
Methanol . . . . . . .
.482
Octane Rating . . . .
.164
.158
Requirements . . . .
Tank Capacity . . . .
.158
.329 Fueling . . . . . . . . . . .
.329 Fuel System Caution . .
.329 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.431
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.389
.394
.392
.481
.390
.390
.394
.389
.212
.213
.392
.390
.389
.389
.481
.394
.395
.473
10
510 INDEX
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . .
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch .
Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) . . . . . . . . . .
Hands-Free Phone (Uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111 Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .322
Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .397
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.414
.479
.472
.165
.165
.479
.162
.155
.110
.149
.296
.316
.165
.224
.350
. . .401
. . .176
. . .160
INDEX 511
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .472
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .471
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . .
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Knee Bolster. . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.14
.20
.17
.16
.12
.15
.61
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .160
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418 Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416 Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415 Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
10
512 INDEX
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Light Bulbs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator . . . .355
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . .223
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .220
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .212
INDEX 513
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . .212
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452
Luggage Rack (Roof Rack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine).
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.448
.444
.486
.223
.500
Manual Transaxle
Fluid Level Check . . . . . .
Lubricant Selection . . . . . .
Manual Transmission . . . . . .
Fluid Level Check . . . . . .
Frequency of Fluid Change
Lubricant Selection . . . . . .
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . .
Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mini-Trip Computer . . . . . . .
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Dimming . . . .
Electric Powered . . . . . . .
Exterior Folding . . . . . . . .
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . .
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.467
.467
.316
.466
.467
.466
.167
.462
.390
.226
.107
.108
.109
.109
.110
.109
.107
.110
10
514 INDEX
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .5
Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .64
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Odometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .221
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Oil Change Indicator, Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481 Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .468
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446 Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445 Parking Brake. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
INDEX 515
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
Personal Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Pets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Pets, Transporting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Phone, Hands-Free (Uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .363
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .31
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . .188
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .483
Power Transfer Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .459
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Rear Drive Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .467
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .107
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Rear Wiper/Washer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
10
516 INDEX
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20
Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
Roll Over Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Roof Type Carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499
Safety, Exhaust Gas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .96
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .473
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . .48
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
INDEX 517
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .147
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .495
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .497
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .500
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
Setting the Clock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .241
Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
Shift Speeds, Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .378
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
Spare Tire. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172
Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .314
Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
10
518 INDEX
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .478
Storage Bin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
Storage, Vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
Sun Visor Extension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . . .61
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447
System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
Tachometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .300
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . .
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tire and Loading Information Placard .
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . .
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General Information . . . . . . . . . . .
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . .
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) .
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . .
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.200
.171
.363
.357
.100
.376
.368
.378
.415
.373
.368
.371
.369
.415
.376
.363
.380
.220
.501
INDEX 519
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Replacement . . . . . . . . . .
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . .
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . .
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . .
Tread Wear Indicators . . .
Tire Safety Information . . . . .
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
24-Hour Towing Assistance
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . .
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . .
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Towing Assistance. . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.371
.377
.379
.357
.358
.372
.417
.375
.406
.376
.357
.403
.398
.125
.434
.402
.411
.402
.125
Towing Vehicle Behind a Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .411
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .398
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .410
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .404
Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .409
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .407
Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
Transaxle
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12
Transmission
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .319
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . .176
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
10
520 INDEX
Trip Computer . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . .
Trip Odometer Reset Button.
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.226
.221
.219
.164
UCI Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
Uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .111
Understanding Your Instrument Panel. . . . . . . . . . .210
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .501
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) Connector . . . .286
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .389
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
Variance, Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .396
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .306
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . .18
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .212
Warning, Roll Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Warnings and Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498
Washer
Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .469
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .470
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
INDEX 521
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .453
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .170
10
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel.
The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly to
the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. The
negative power connection should be made to body sheet
metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. This
connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the roof
or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used in
mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may affect
the accuracy or operation of the compass on vehicles so
equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use only
fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to ensure
a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference
between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s
electronic systems.
2013
Chrysler Group LLC
13MK74-126-AC
3rd Edition
Printed in U.S.A.
Patriot

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project